f 9 HIPLE AND a. s # li i^i BSf3 ijoj ^3 l^Si TACTICS, .cj^EDIPiLd^l OiP] ®K1:E WQiLOlfflll MEMPHIS: 1861. / I HARDEE'S RIFLE ■a AND ( I 1 < r ■ LIGHT INFANTRY TA.CTICS. COMPLETE m ONE VOLUME. 1861 Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2010 with funding from Duke University Libraries http://www.archive.org/details/hardeesrifleligh01hard I U 7 } lii tx «i/ .11 & U til ^ 3 ^ ', »'•> mvmxmw^^ TITLE FIRST. Abticlh First. Formation qf a Regiment in order of battle, en- in line. 1. A REGIMENT Is Composed of ten companlps, which will habitually be posted from right to left, tn the foUow- IiiKorder: first, sixth, fourth, niutb, third, eighth, fiflb, tenth, seventh, second, accordiog to the rank of captains. 2. With a less number of companies the same principle will be observed, viz: the first captain will command the right company, the second captain the left company, the third captain the right centre company, and so on. ."5. Th« companies thus posted will be designated from right to Itft, ftrd company, ticcond company, &c. This designation will be observed in the manivuvres. 4. The first two companies on the right, whatever their denomination, will form the.rtrsi division ; the next two companies the second division; and so on to the left. 5. Each company will be divided Into two equal parts, which will bo designated as the first and seconnimaad, iu a k-ssoti, in the theoretical instrnctl'in, should flrut bo given by the instructor, and then repented, in aucct-ssion, by the non- commissioned offlcers, eo that while they becorim babitn- atod to tho commands, nniformity may bo estublished la tbo manner of giving them. 4.5. In tho Hchool of tho Boldlor, the company offlcors will bo tho instructors of the squads; but if there bo not n Bulhclent number of company ofllccrs present, Intelli- il»nt Bergeanta may !« ■obstitnted; and two or throo squads, under Borgeant Instnictors, be enporintcndod, »t the Barao time, by an officer. 4C. In tho Bchoerfpctpd only by Joining theory to practice. The colonel will often prac- tise tbem In marching and in ostiniiiting distances, and he will carefully endeavor to cause them to take steps equal in K^ngth and swirtiicss. Thoy will also bo exer- cised In tho double quick Btep. 54. Tbo Instruction af cfllcers will include all the Titles In this syRtem of drill, and such regulations as proscribe their duties In peace imd wur. 5.1. Every oOlcer will niHUe himself peifeetly acquaint- ed with the bugU slgniil'': and Bbould, by pnictice, bo enabled, if necewary, to sound them. Thin knowledfje, 80 necessary In general InBtruction, bcocmeB o( vital ini- portanoo on actual tcrvico In the tield. Instruction cf Sergeants. 50. As the discipline and elliciency of a company niale- rlally depend on the conduct and character of it-i ner- geants, they should bo selected with care, ami prii|..Tly iuBtructed in all the duties appertaining to their rink. 67. Their theoretical luetruclion bh.iubl incluilo tlio School ef tho Soldier, the School of the Comjiany, ai^il tbo Drill for Skirmishers. They ihould likewise know all thu details of sorvieo, and tho rogulations preset ibing their duties in garrison and In campaign. £8. Tho captain selei-tH from tho corporals In his com- pany thoBO whom ho Judges fit to be admitted to the theorotlcal Instruction of tho sergeants. Trtttrridinn of CbrporjU. TO. Their theoretical Instrnctlon phould Include the School of tho Soldier, and such ri'gulation^i as prescribe their dotics In garrison und in canipaigu. 00. The captain eoleots from bin company a few privatos who may bo admitted to the thoorotiOHl lustruction of tho corporals. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PAET I. Cl. As the inslrnction of ecrgeants and corporals ia in- tended principally to qualify them for tho inetraction of the privates, thoy should be taught not euly to exectite, but to explain intelligibly every thing they may bo rc- qnirod to teach. Cbmman; Because, It gives equilibrium to the position. The In- Rtructor will observe that many recruits have the bad habit of dropping a Bhoulder, of drawing In a side, or of advaucing a hip, particularly the right, when rnder anus. Thf«o are defects ho will labor to correct. TTie upper part of the hodg incUning forviard; Because, commonly, recruits are disposcMl to do the re- verse, to projnct the belly, and to throw back the shonl- ders, when they wiah to hold thcmBelves erect, from which result great inconvcnionccs in marching. The habit of iucliuing ferward the upper ]>Art of the body is 80 important to contract, that the instructor must en- force it at the beginning, particularly with recrcitfl who have naturally the opposite habit. BhovMert square ; B8 executed by inverse means. P4. The Instructor will take particular care that tbe movement of the head does not derange the s<]uarvness of the ihonlders, which will bapi>cn if the movement of the farmer bo too sudJen. M. NVhen the Instructor shall wish tbe recruit to pan from the atate of attention to that of eaao, ho will com- mand : Bkst. 8C. To canse a resumption of tbe habitual position, the instructor wlU command : 1. AUention. i. Boiup.. 87. At tho flrst word, the recruit will fix hli attention ; at the second, he will resume the prescribed position and Bteadlneas. Lesson 11. F\icings. 88. Facing to the right and left will be executed lu ono tmv, or pause. The Instructor will command : 1. eqitad, 2. RigU (or fc/?) — Face. 89. At the second command, raise tho right foot slightly, turn on the left Iml, raiding the toi-n a little, and then" replace tho right htel by the side of the left, and on the same lino. 00. Tho full face to the rear (or front) will bo executed In two Umc-3, or pauses. The Instructor will command: 1. Squad. 2. ABon— Face. 91. (First Time ) At tho word alovt, the recruit will turn on tho left heel, bring the loft toe to tho front, carry the right foot to Ihe ro»r, the hollow opposite to, and full three inches from, the Uft heel, the feet equare to each other. 92. {Seco^id Time.) At tho word face, the recrnit will turn on both heels, raise the tee a little, extend the hams, face to tho rear, bringing, at tho same time, tho right heel by the side of the left. 03. The instiuctor will talco core that these motions do not derange the position of the body. LE£60N III. Principhi of the Direct Step. 94. Tlife length of tho direct step, or pace, lu common time, will bf twonty-elght inches, reckoning from heel to heel, and In swiftness, at tho rate 01 ninety in a minute. 'J6. Tho instructor, scoing the recruit confirmed in his position, will explain to him the principle and mechan- lum of tills step — placing himself bix or seven paces from, and facing to, tho recruit. IXo will himself execute slowly the step in the way of Ulnbtration, and then command : 1, Bq^tad, for^raud. 2. Common time. 3. BLincii 06. At the flrst commaud, the recruit will throw tho weight of the body on tho right leg, without bonding tho 'j7. At the third command, he will smartly, but without a Jerk, carry straight forward the loft foot twenty-eight Inches from the right, the sole neor tho ground, the ham extended, the toe a little depressed, and, as also tho koeo, slightly turned out; ho will, at the same time, throve tho weight of the body forward, nod plant Hat tho l"1"t foot, without shock, precisely at tho distance where it finds itself from the right when tho weight of the body Is bronglit forward, tho whent, the knee somewhat raised — will plant his left foot, the toe first, thirty-three inches fi"om the right, and with the feot will then execute what has Just been prescribed for the left. This alternate move- ment of the lege will take place by throwing the weight of the body on the foot that is planted, and allowing a natural, oscillatory motion to the arras. 114. The double quick step may be executed with dif- ferent degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circumstancoH the cadence of this step may be Increased to one hundred and eighty per minute. At this rate a distance of four thousand yards will be passed over In about twenty-five minutes. 115. Tho recruits will be exercised also In running. 116. The principles are the same as for the double quick step, the only difibrence consisting In a greater degree of swiftness. 117. It Is recommended In marching at double quick time, or the run, that the men should breathe as much as possible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed. Experience has proved that, by conforming to this prin- ciple, a man can pass over a much longer distance, and with less fatigue. PART SECOND. OEHEBAL BCLE8. 118. The Instructor will not pass the men to this «»cond part until they shall be well established la the position of the body, and In the manner of marching at the different steps. 119. He will then unite four men, whom ho will placo in the same rank, elbow to elbow, and instruct them in position of shoulder arms, as follows : Lessos I. I'iittctplo of Shouldered Arim. 120. The recruit being placed as explained In the firf t lesson of the first part, the instructor will cause him to bend the right arm slightly, and place the piece In it, in the following manner : 121. The piece in the right hand— tho barrel nearly vertical and resting In the hollow of the shoulder — the guard to the front, the arm hanging nearly at its full length near the body; the thumb and fore-finger em- bracing tho guard, the remaining fingers closed together, and grasping the swell of the stock just under the cock, which rests on the little finger. 122. Recruits are frequently seen with natural defects In the conformation of tho shoulders, breast and hips. These the Instructor will labor to correct in the lessons without arms, and afterwards, by stoady endeavors, so that the appearance of the pieces. In the same line, may be uniform, and this without constraint to the men in their positions. 123. The instructor will have occasion to remark that recruits, on first bearing arms, are liable to derange their position by lowering the right shoulder apd the right band, or by sinking the hip and spreading out the elbows. 124. He will be careful to correct all these faults by continually rectifying the position; he will sometimes take away the piece to replace it the better ; he will avoid fiitiguing the recruits too much in the beginning, but labor by degrees to render this position so natural and easy that they may remain in It a long time without fatigue. 125. Finally, the instructor will take great care that the piece, at a shoulder, be not carried too high nor to<. low: if too high, the right elbow would spread out, tho soldier would occupy too much space in his rank, and tho piece be made to waver ; if too low, the flies would be too much closed, the soldier would not have the necessary space to handle his piece with facility, the right arm would become too much fatigued, and would draw down the shonlder. 8 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER-PART II. IZ<). Tha in'trirtor, h->foro p^wln? to the BecAn"! leeson, win canre to \>riHk execution of the first motion of each time (or p.iuse). Tho commiinds, ^'•'), tliree, and four will decide the brisk execution of tho other motions. As soon as the rocroits shall well comprehend the positions of tho Boveral motions of a time, they will bo tanght to execute the time without riStlug on its different motions ; tho mo- chanisiii of tho time will nevertheless bo observed, ns well to give a perfect uso of tho piece, as to avoid the sinking of, or slurring over, cither of tho motions. 132. Tho manual of arms will bn taught in the fol- lowing progroBflion ; The instructor will command : Support — Abus. Otm tirM and fhreo motion*. 133. (FIM mMion.) Bring tlio piece, with tho right hand, porpendicnlarly to the front and between the eyes, the barrel to the re ir seize tho piece with the left hand at tho lower hand, raise this hand as hiu;h as tho chin, and Keizo the piece at the same time with tho right hand four Inches below tho cock. 134. (Hccond notion.) Turn tho piece with tho right hand, the barrel to the front ; carrying tho piece to the left shoulder, rind pass thoforo-arms extended on the breast between the right hand and the cock ; support t!ie cock against tho loft fore-arm, tho left hand resting on the right breast. la.'i. (Tliird Motion.) Drop tho right hand by the side. 136. When the instructor may wish to give repo»e in thii position, be will command: Best. iri7. At thi command, tho rocrnlts villi bring np Hiiiartly the right hand to tho handle of tho piece (.small of tho stock), when they will not bo required to [ireserve si.ence, or steadiness of i)0'ition. 138. When the Instructor may wish iho recmlta to paaa from this position to that of alienee and ateadlnosa, he will command: 1. AUeniion, 2 8 quad. 130. At the second word, the rocrnlts will resume tho position of tho third motion of support aniu, Bhoulilcr—A.&M». Ona llmo and three motion*. 140. {First motion.) Grasp tho piece with the right hand un2 When tho instructor may wish to pass tho re- cruits from this position to thot of silonco and atoadlness, ho will command : 1. Attention. 2. BQDiD. 1C3. At tho second word, tho recruits will resume tho position of order arm*. Bhou'dcr—LZTiB. Ono timo and two motions. 154. (,nret motion.) Baiso the pleco vertically with the right hand to the height of the right breast, and opposite SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PAET II. the shoulder, the elbow close to the body ; seize the p-eoe with the left hand below the right, and drop quickly the right band to giasp the piece at the swe 1 of the ttock, ihe thumb and furoUug r embracing the gnard; press the piece against the shoulder with theje-t hand, the right arm nemly strHight. 155. (Second msUon.) Drop the left hand quickly by the lide. Load t» nine iimes. I. Load.* One lime ond one mriion, 156. Grasp the piece with the left hand as high as the right elbow, and bring It Tertically opposite the middle of Iht^body, shift tbe right hand to the uppor band, pliioe the bu't between tho feet, the ba:rel to t^ic front ; seize it with the left hftnd near the muzz'.e, ■» hch should be three inches from tho boily ; carry the right hand to cte cartridge box. 2. J2a)id.'e— Castbidqe. One time and one motion. 157. Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next two fingers, and place it between the teeth. 3. Tear— Oabtridqe, One time ami one motion. 158. Tear the j aper to the powder, h^-ld the cartridge upright between the thucib and lirst two fingers, near tLe top ; in this pusi ion place it in front of auu near the muzzle— the back of the hand to ihe front. 4. CVior^e— Oabtbidqk. One time arid one motion, 159. Empty the powder into tho barrel: disongsgo the ball from tbe paper with tiie right hand .tnd the thumb and first two finge s of the loft : insert it into the bore, the pointed end uppermost, and press it down with t he right thumb ; seize tbe head of the rammer witn the thumb and fore- finger of the right hand, the other fingers closed, the albows near the body. 6. i>;ato— Baumeb. One time an^ three motions, IGO. [First motion.) Half draw tho rammer by extend- ing the right arm ; steady it in this position with the lett tbumU ; graip the rammer near the muzzle with the right hand, the little finger uppermost, the nails to the front, the thnaib extended along t! e rammer. IGl. {iyicond motion ) Clear the rammer from the pipes by aga.u extending the arm ; the rammer in the pro- longa ion of the pipes. 162. (Third motion.) Turn the rammer, the little end of the rammer passing near tho left shoulder ; place the head of tho rammer on the ball, the back of tho hand to the front. 6. itani— CABTRiPas. One tima and one motion. 163. Insert the rammer as far as the right, and steady It in this position with ihe thumb of the lift hand ; seize the rammer at the small ei'd with the thumb and fjre finger 01 I he right hand, the b'lck oftliohanil to tho front; press the ball home, the elbows near tho body. • WhenoTcr tho loadings snd firings are to bo executed, tho Instructor will oausg tht gatuidga b»x«s to b« brought to tha (rout. a 7. Iieivrn— Bammeb. One time and three motions. 161. {First motion.) Draw the rammer hftlf-way out, aiid steady it iu this position with the left thumb ; erapp it near tho muzzle with the right hand, ihe little fioger uppermost, the nails to the front, tho thtmb ahng tho rammer; clear the rammer from tho bore by extending the arm, ihe nails to tha front, tho ramm;-r in the prolon- gation of Ihe bore. 105 (Second motion.) Turn the rammer, the bend of tho r lumer passing near tho left sliou der, and in»ert it In tho pipes until iho right hand reaches the muzzle, th» nailrs to tho fro t. 166. (Third motion ^ Forcg the rammer home by plactnct the little finder o'' 'i'o light h>i'd on the head of the rammer; pass tho Itf '.,ind down the barrel to the extent of tho arm, withuut deprasslni; th. shoulder. 8. Prime.-:* One time and two motion'. 167. (First motion ) With the loft hand rafne tho piece till tho hand U as high as the eye gra-p the small of the Etock with tho right hnnd : ha f face to the right ; place, at tho same time, the right toot bediud and at right angles with the ielt ; h-i Iioilow of tt:e right footBga'Dstt e left heel. Slip the left baud down to the lower bind, tho thumt along thj stork, he left elbow against the body: ' ring the piece to the right sidw, tbe butt below iho right fore arm — the email (>f tho stoek against the body and two inches below the right breast, the barrel upwar s. tho muzzle ou a le'.el with the i ya. 1C8. (Second motion) Half cock with the thumb of tbe right baud, the ting' rs supporte against the gnard and fh,i small ol tho stock— remove the ■id cap with en of the Pilfers of the right hand, and with the thumb an i fore- linger of the same hand take n cap from the pouch, place it on the nipple, and press it down with t e humb; seize the small «.f the stock with the right hand. 9. Shoulder— Anas. One time and two motions. 169. (Rrst Motion ) Bring the piece to the light should- er and support it there witv, the left hand, face to the front; bring the right heel to the eide of and on a lin« with the left; grasp tho piece »itU the right hand as in- dicated in it the position of should r arms. 170. (.Second motion.) Drop the left nand quickly by the side. Beadt. Quo lime and three motions. 171. (First motion.) Baise the piece slightly with thd right hand, making a half face to the right on the left heel ; carry tho tight foot to thii rear, and plic-.s it at right angi s to the loft, the hollow of it opposite to, aai ag'iiust the left heel; grasp the piece witl. the left hand at tbe lower band and 'Ictach it 8li^htly from the shoulder. 172. (Second motion ) Bringdown the piece witti both hands, the bartel upwards, the l*ft thumb extc-nd(d a)ong the stock, tbe b 'tt beltwthe right fv>re-arm, the small of tho stuck agsinst the body and two inches bolow ho rigiit breast, tho mnzzle as h gh ns the eye, tho Ielt elbow against tbe side ; place at thi- s 'mo f ii e the right thumb on the bend of tho cock, tho other fingers under and against the guard. 173. (Thrd motion.) Cock, and s iz> the piece at tho email ol the stock without deranging the position of tho butt. * If Maynard"8 primer be used, tho command Trill be, toad in riqht timen, and the ciRhth command will bo, xhoulder arms, and exconted from return rammer, in one time and two motions, M {First motion.) Raise tho pieco with tho left hand, and t&k» tho position of shoulder arms, as indicated No. 145. (Second motion.) Drop th« loft hand quickly by th* lid*. 10 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART IL Aim. One limeland on* mofion. 171. VinUe the piece with both baaJx, »nd tnpiiort the butt sgainit the ri^ht shoulder; the leTt olbow down, therig'it aa hii:b ua the shoulder; Incline the head upon the butt. BO tliut the right eyo may percilve quickly the notch of the hiiusse, the front sight, and the olject aimed at ; the left eye closed, the right thumb extended along the stock, the fore-finfter on the tripger. 176. When recruits are furmed in two ranks to execute the firings, the front rank men will raise a little lees the right elLow, in order to facilUato the aim of the rear rank men. 170. The rear rank men, in aiming, will each carry the right foot about eigbt inches to the right, and towards ibu k'ft heel of the man next on the right, inclining the upper part of the body forward. KlBn, One time and one mo'.iuu. 177. Press the f.ire-flnger apiiinst the trigger, Are, without lowering or turuiug the bead, and remaiu in this pohi;tioD. 178. lostructors will bo careful (o observe when the men fire, tliat :bey aim at some distinct object, and that the barrel be ho directed that tlie lino of fire and the line of sight be in the same vortical plane. They will often cause the tiring to the executed on ground of different Inclinations, in order to accustom the men to Are at ob- ji»cts either above or below them. Load. One lime and one motion. 170. Bring down the piece with both hands, at the same tira? face to the) ront and take the position ot load&i Indicated Mo. LOG. Each itar runk aian will bring his right fiKtt b« the side ot the left. ISO. The men being in this position, tho instructor will aaube the loading to be continued by the commands i»nd moans prescriU'd No. 100 and following. 181. If, [after firing, the instrnctor should not wish Ihe r. At the command t/iou/dfr, pi ice tho thumb upcii tbecock,ih fore-finger on tiio trigger, ball-cock, and seize the small of the stock with the right band. At the command ai-(;,«, bring up l\\t\ piece briskly to tho right nl oulder, and retake the position ot shoulder arms. 187. The recruits being at shoulder tirms, when t'le luBtructor shall wish to fix bayonets, he will remmand : r^jT— Bi.io.Nri. Om time and (hr*« motionf. IM. (firft notion ) Grasp the piece with fh« loft hand at the height of thn shoulder, and detach it slightly from the shoulder with the righ'band. \h^ . {fiecond motion ) (^ilt the pece with tho right hand, lower it with il e left hand, o pohite the middle of the body, and place the buttoetwecn the feet without shock; the rammer to the r-nr, the barrel verticil, the muzzle three inches from tho body; seize it with the right hand at the upper banJ, and carry tho lelt hsnd re^crved to the handle ol the sabto-bavcnet. I'.'O {Third w4ion.) Draw tho sa'bre bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the extremity of tho barrel ; seize the pind 1 » tho side. C/iarf/e— BiTONET. One time and tiro molimt. j'.>3. {Fir.U moti n.) Kale the piece slightly with the right hand and niaho a halt face to tho ri^ht on the le t heel ; place tho hollow of the rij;ht foot opposiio to, and tliree inches fiom tno left heed, tho feet square ; seize the piece at the same lime with the Isft band a little above the lower baud. 194. {tgainst tho body ; seize the small of the stock at tho same tiaip, with tho right band, which will be supported aiialnst the hip : the point of the sabre bayonet as high us tho eyo. ShCiiiUl-r — Abms. One time and two motioM. 195. {First mnlion ) Throt#np the plec? briskly with tho left hand in facing to the front, placo it ng inat tho right shoulder, the rammer to the front; turn tho right hand so as to embrace the guard, slide tin left hand to the height of the shoulder, the right hand nearly extended. I'Jb. {Seeond motion.) Drop tho let hand smartly by the sido. Trail — Asms. One tim« and two molionn. 197. (First VMtion.) Tho same as tho first motion ct order arms. 198. {Second motion.) Incline the muzzle slightly to tho front, the butt to tho rear and about lour inches irom tho ground. The riuht Uiiud supported at tho hip, will so hold tiepiec) that the rear rank men nmyn>t touch with thoir bayonets tho men in tho front rank. SnouLOEa— Abma. I'.i ). At the command tAofiMfr, raise the pIsco perpen- dicularly iu tho ri^ht hand, the little finger in rear of the barrel; at the command arms, pxecu'e what h(w been prencrlbed for the ihould^'r frrm the position of order arms. .SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIEK-PART II. 11 r)(/l<;— Bayonet. One time and three motiont. UOO. (Fn-dand second molions.) The Bfttne as the first and Becond motiOLS of ./Ix bayonet, except (bat, nt the end (■( the second command, the thumb of the right hand ■will ()0 plekced on the Bprint; of (ho Batro-bayoaet, and the loft hand will embrace the handle of the sabro-bayonet and Iho barrel, the thumb extended along the blade. 201. {Third modoii.) Press tlie (humb of the right hand on the spring, wrest off the sabrc-bnyonct, turn it to thw right, lower the guard until it touches the right hand, which will seiza the back and tho tilgo of the blade be- tweon the thumb and first two Augers, the other fingers holding the piece ; change tlie position of the band with- out quitting the handle, return th» gabre-bayoeet to the scabbard, and seize the pieca with the left hand, the arm i'xt-:nded. S^oi(We>-— Asms. One time and tico moCiout. •M)2. {First motion.) The same as the first motion from lix bayonet. No. 191. 203. {Second motion.) The same as the second motion from fix bayonet, No. 1U-. Secure— Amis. One time and three motiuits. 204. {First motion.) The snmo as the first motionof jn^- port ama, Pia. 16?., except with the right hand seize the piece at the small of the stock. 205. {Second moHon.) Turn the piece with both hands, tho barrel to Iho front ; bring it opposite tho left shoul- der, tho butt against the hip, the left baud at tho lower band, tho thumb as high as tlie chin and extended on the rammer ; the piece erect and detached from the shoulder, tho le't fore-arm against the piece. 200. {Third motion.) Reverse the piece, pass it under the left arm, the left hand remaining at llio lower band, the thumb on the rammer to prevent it from sliding out, tho little finger resting against the hip, tho right hand rolling at the same time by the side. Shoulder — Arms. One lime and three motions. 207. {First motion ) Raise the piece with (he left hand, and seize it with the riglit hand at the small of tho stock. The piece erect and detached from tho shoulder, the butt against the hip, the left fore-arm along the piece. 208. {Second motion ). Tho same as the second motion of thoiddcr arms from a sujiport. 209. {Thi^d motion.) The same as tho third motion of thoulder arms from a support, ^ Right shoiiller shift — Arms, One lime and two motions, 210. {First hiolion.) Detach the piece perpendiculftrly from the shoulder with the right hand, and seize it with the left between the lower baud and guide-sight, raise the piwe, the left hand at tlio height of the shoulder and four inches from it; place, at tho same time, the right hand ou tho butt, the beak between the first two fingers, the other two fingers under tho butt plate. 211. {Second motion ) tiuit the piece with tho left hand, raise and place the piece on the right shoulder with the right hand, the lock plate upwards ; lot fall, at the samo time, tho loft hand by the side. S?iouldci — Arms. One time and two motions. 212. {Fint motion.) Raise the piece perpendicularly by extending the right arm to its full length, the rammer to tho font, at the same time s. {Second motion.) Raise tlio piece, bringing tbe left foot by the side of tho right ; turn the piece with right hand, tho rammer to the front; at the same t'mn quit the cartridge box with the left hand, and drop thld h.".nd by the side. Imptc'ion of Arms. 22G. Th.i recruits being ac ordered arms, and havi; g tho sabre-bayonet In tho scatibnrd, it the instrnctor wishes to cause au inspection of arms, ho will com- mand : SCHOOL or THE SOLDIER—PART II. On* Iir7i4 and two motiont. 127. {Krtt motion.) £oizo the piece with the left hand I>alovr aiid ueur th<« upper bauJ, corry it with both haudi opposite the middle of the budy, the butt between the fxt, th« rammer to the rear, the bariel vertical, the niu/.zle about »breP inches fr^>m the bod) ; carry the left hand rereiird to the Batrn-bay.mot, draw it from the »<".bbard and fix it on the barrel; Krasp the piece wi;h the left hand below and near th. urpor band, ielie Ihc rammer with the thumb and foro-fluger of the rlghi band bent, the ether fingers c!u»od. 22i. (Second motion ) Praw thn rammer b» has been oxplft-ncd in loadinj and lot it glide to iho bottom of tlie bore, rpp'ace the piece with the left hand oppenite the ri^ht shoulder, and retake the ponilion of orrfo«ltion presc'lbed at tho com- mand intjifction arms, return the rammer, and resume the position ot ordered arm). 231. If, instfHd ot in>]>fct:'on of amn, the instructor should merely wieh to caiise bayOQCti to be fixed, he will command : /'ijr— Batovet. 232. Take the position Indicated No. 227, fix bayonets as has been explained, and ia modiately res time tho povi- tioi of ordered orm». ■.!33. If it bo the wish of the instructor, after firing, to ascertain whether the pieces have been diachurged, he will command : Spring— Bammehs. 23t. Put the rammer in the barrel as has been ox- ylaiued aiiove, and immediately retake tho position of 0rdercd ami. 2il6 The instructor, for tho purpose stated, can take tho rammer by the small end, and spring it in the barrel, or rauio each recroit to make it riog in the bariol. 236. E4ch recruit, afti'.r tho instructor passes him, will rf tarn rammer, and resume the position of ordered armt. RcmarU on iht JfumnZ of Arms. 237. The mannal of orms frequently distorts the per- sons of recuitu befur • they acquire ease and coi fidence in the several positions. The iuBtructor will therefore frequently recur to elementary principles in tho cciirsoof the lessons. 233 Rscruits are also extremely liable to cnrvo the sides and bacli, and to deranjj'' the shoulders, espc i.ily in loadinx. Consequently, the instructor will not caun th m to dwell too long, at a tl i.e, In one position. 219. When, alter some days of exercise in the manual of arms, the four inec shall be well established in their use, tha instructor will always t(rmionte the lesson by marching the men for some time in one r'l: k, and at one pace aoart, in common and quick time, In order to con- firm them more and m:)re iu the mechmism of the step; he will alSH teach 'hem to mark time and to change step, which win be executed iu the fjllowlng manner : To marti lime. 240. Tho four men marching in the direct step, tho in- (trustor will command : 1. JfarX- limt. 2. MlSCB. 241. At tho second command, which will b« grlvsn at the instant a foot is comme to the gronnd, tho recruits Mill make a semblanoe of marching, by bringing the heels I y thaside of each other, and ohserviDgthe cadence of the step, by raJsiiig each foot alternately without ad Vhbcing. 212. The Intmotor wishing the direct step to b« ro- sumid, will command: 1. Forward. 2. M.VBCa. 243. At the second crmmand, which will bo given si prescribed above, the rec(uit« will retake the etcp cf twenty-eight inches. To change step. 254. Th'' fqii.\'J being in march, the instrnctor will command : 1. Change ilep. 2. MabcjI. 245. At theoecond command, which will be given at tho instant cithtr foot is comii>g to the ^ri'uud, bring tho fo;it which is in rear by the side of that which is in Iront, and step cffagHiu with thu foot which was in Iront. To march bacltcards. 'JlCi, Tho instrnctor wishing the squad to march back- wards, will command : 1. 5.;t(a(i baclicard. 2. MAScn. 217. At tho second command, the recruits will step off smartly with the left foot fourteen Inches to tho roar, reckoning from heel to heel, and so on with Iho feet iu BuccessioQ till tho command halt, which will always be preceded by the caution squad. Tho men will halt at this command, and bi iug back thu foot iu front by the side of the other. 24''. This step will always bo executed In quick time. 249. The instructor wid be watchful that the recruits march straight to the rear, and that tho erect position of tho body and tho piece Le not deranged. Lessok III, Tu lo X'atitnl of Jrms. At the third command, the men will come to the position of ready as heretofore expla ned. At the fourth they will aim ac- cording to the rank in which each may find himself placed, the rear rank men iuclining forward ■» little the upper part of the body, in order that their pieces may reach as mnch beyond the front rank as possible- 265. At the sixth command, they will load their p'eces and return immedintoly to the position of vidn- 263. The instructor will recommenco the firing by the commands : 1. S rear rank will advance the right foot about eight inches toxards the right heel of the man next on the right of his file leader, and aim to the lelt, inclining tho upper part of the body forward and bending a littl? the right knee. 272. In both cases, at the command load, the men of each rank will come to the position of load as prescribed in the direct fire; the rear rank mtn bringiug back the foot which is to the right and front by thf sido of the other. ISach man will continue to load ns if isolated. To fire hy Jilt. 273. The fire by file will be executed by tho two ranks, the files of which will fire successively, end without regu- lating on each other, except for the first fire. 274. The iiistructor will command : 1. Fire 6y file. 2. Squad. 3. Keabt. 4. Commexcb FIBIKO. 275. At the third command, the two ranks will take the position prescribed in the direct fire. 27 ij. At the fourth command, the file on the right will aim and fire ; the rear rank man in aiming will take the pesition indicated, No. 176. 277. The men of this file will load their pieces briskly and fire a second time ; reload and fire again, and so on in continuation. 278. The second file will aim, at the instant tho first brings down pieces to reload, and will conform in all re- spects to what has just been prescribed for tho first file. 279. After the first fire, tho front and rear rank men will not bo required to fire at the sums time. 280. Kach man. after loading, will return to the position of ready and continue the flre. 281. When the instructor wishes the fire to cease, he will command : Cc'ase— FiRixo. 282. At this command, the men will cease firing. I they have fired they » ill load their pieces and bring them to a shoulder; if at the posi'ion of ready, they will half- cocs and shoulder arms. If in the position of aitn, tney will bring down their pieces, hall-cock, and shoulder arms. To fire hy rank. 2S3. The fire by rank will be executed by each entire rank, alternately. 281. The instrnctor will command : 1, Fire by rank 2. Squad 3. Beadt. 4. Rear rani. 5. Aim. 6. Fire. 7. Load. 235. At tho third command, the tvro ranks will take the position of ready, as prescribed in the direct fire. 230. At the seventh command, tha rear rank will execute that which has been prescribed In the direct fire, and afterwards take the position of ready. 2S7. As soon as the instructor sees several men of the rear ralSk in the position of ready, ho will command: 1. D-onl rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 288. At these commands, the men in the front renk will execute what has bten prescribed for the rear rank, but they will not step off viththe right foot. 2i9. The instructor will recommence the firing by tho rear rank, and will thus continue to alternate from rank to rank, until he shall wish the firing to cease, when ha will command, cease firing, which will be executed as here- tofore prescribed. Lesson V. To fre and load hneeling. 200. la this ex3rci8e the squad will be supposed loaded and drawn up in one r^uk. Th*» instruction will be given to each man individually, without times or motions, and in the following manner. 291. The instructor will command : Fire and load kxeeliso. 292. At this command, tho man on the right of tha squad will move forward three paces ond halt; then carry tho right foot to the rear and to the right of tho left heel, and in a position convenient for placing th« right knee upon the ground in bonding the left log ; place tho riuht knee upon the ground : lower the piece, the left fore-arm supported upon the thigh on tho same side, the right hand on'the small of tho stock, the butt resting on the right 14 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART IIL thigh, the left band fupportiag the pi*c« luar tbo l»wer bHDd. •JS:i. Ho will next move fho right leg to f lie left around I lie kno« Hupport'.xf oa th ■ ground, aulil liiia leg ia uuarly ix-rpendicular to the directiun of the left foot, and tliua Hcat himsolt comfortably on the ripht heel. 'JH. Bilse the piece with the ri^lit hand and Hupport it with the loft, holding it near the lower band, the left el- tvjw iPhtirc on tlio kft tliiph near llii'kiii-o; seizu th« hammer with llio thumb, the T'ln-QoKor under the giitrd, cock and sci/.o th<.< piece at the small of the stuck; bring the piece to ih'j shoulder, aim and^rc. 2?5. liriog the piece d»wu assoon as iti-* flred,anicce to the loar risiDK ou the knee, the barrel downwardu, the butt roHtJNK en the ground; in this position support the piece with the It ft liaud at the upper band, draw cartridee with the rii^ht and load the piece, ramminij iho ball, if necessary, with both haU'lH. 29C. WheB loaded bring the piece to the front with the left hand, wh'ch holds ic at the upper band; seize it at xamo time with the right hand at the small ot the stock ; turn the piece, the bHirtl uppermost and nearly horizon- tiil, thf- left elbow rtHtinc on the left thigh ; half cock, re- nioTo the old cap and i>rime, and return to the rauks. 2'.i7. The second man will then be taught what has just been prescribed for the first, and so on through tha re- mainder of the squad. To JIre and load lying. 293. In this exercise the squad will be in*une rank and loaded; the iustructiou will bo given Individually, and without times or motions 299. The instructor wUl command : FfBE A!«D L-iAB LTIXO. 3J0. At ^this command, the man on the right of tlie Equad will move forward three faces and halt ; ho will then bring his piece te an order, drop on both knees, and place himself on the ground flat on his belly. lu this pubition he will support the piece nearly horizontal with ihe luft hand, holding it near the lower band, the buft end of the piece and the left elbow renting on the grouud, the barrel uppermost; cock the pieae with the right hand, and carry this hand to the small of the stock ; raise the )■ butt tiud resting on the ground ; take out a cartridpj with the right hand ; seize thesmall of the stock with this hand, holding the cartridge with iho thumb and two first fliigers; he will then throw himselt on bis back, still holding the piece with both hands ; carry the piece to the rear. Hace the butt between the heels, the barrel up, the niuizlo eleva'ed. In this position, charge cartrid.e, draw rammer, ram cartridge, and roTfl and near the lower band. SOS. {Second tnotion.) Carry the right foot twenty inches perpendicularly lo the far, the T'tiht heel on the prrlongHtion of the left, the knees slightly bjnt. Iho weight of tho body resting equally on both legs; lower the piece with both hands, the b:irrel upiHhs , the pMition vj' the body, and the manual of arms, the instructor will unite eikbtBien, at least, and twelve men, at most, iu order to teach them the principles of nligiunent, the princi- ples o the touch of elbows in marching to tlo> fiout, the principles of the march by tho fi ink, wheeling from a halt, wheeling ia marching und tho change of direc- tion to the side of tho guide. lie will place tho squad in ouo riinkolbow to olbow, ami numlier the men from right tv left. Lesson I. Aliijiiinenti. ."ill. Tho iuatnictor will nt first teach tho recr it.s to align tlicmselvfis man by nmn, in ordir the bettor to malce them comprehend th < vrinciples of altgumcut ; to this end, he will coniniand the two men on tho right flank to march two pacex to the front, and having aligned th"m, he will caution the remainder of tho i-qnid to move up, as they may bo Hucce8t>i>ely called, each Iiy his number, und align themselves successively on the Hue of thd first two men. 312. Kach recruit, as (leslgiiatod by liif number, will turn tlio head and eyoi to tho right as pr.?«cribed in tho first lesson of tho fir.st |iart,and will march iaqnick time two paces forward, hhorteniiig the last so as to find him- self about six iucboH behind tho now alignment, which he ought never to lass: he will text move up steadily by steps of two or three iiulies; tho hams extended,' to tho Hide of tlio man next to him on Iho alignment, go that, without deranging the head, the line of tlio eyes or that of tho shoulders, ho may fiud himself in the exact line of his neighbor, whoso elbow he will lightly touch without op niiig his owu. 313. The instructor seeing tho rank well aligood, will command ; Fboni. 31t. At t>iis, the recruits will turn eyes to the front, and remain firm. 315. Alignments to the left will be executed on the, same principles. SCHOOL OF THE SQLDIEK— PART III. 15 316. When the recruits shall have thus learned to align themselv b man by man, correctly, and without groping or jostling, the instructor will cause the entire ranlc to align itself at once by the command : m^M (or ?r/0— Dress. ^^17. At this, the rank, except the two men pl.aced in advance as a basis of alignment, will move np in quick time, and place themselves on the new line, according to tlie piirciples prcsrribed No. 312. 31H. The instructor placed five or six paces in front, and facing the rank, will carefully oliserrethat the prin- ciples are followed, and then pans to the flank that has fcrved as the basis, to verify the alignment. 319. The instructor seeing the greater number of the rank aligned, will command : Feont. 320. Tho instructor may afterwards order Ihis or lltaf file forwird or hack designating each by its number. The file or flleb designated, only, will slightly turn th» head to- wards the ba-'id, to judge how nuich thoy ought to move up or back, steadily place themselves on tlio line, and than turn eyes to tho front, \«ithout a particular command to that eCToct. 321. Alignmeits to the rear wiil bo executed on the same principles, the rccruitj stepping back a little be- j»nd the line, and then dressing up according to the principles prescribed Ko. 312, tho instructor command- Sight (or leji) backward— DtLEss. 322. After each alignment, the instructor, will examine tho position of the men, and cause tho rank to come to or- dered arma, to prevent too ranch fatigue, and also tho dinger of uegligenca at shouldered arms. Less'.n II. 323. Ihe men having learned, in the flrct and second parts, to march with steadiness in common time, and to take steps equal in length and swiftness, will be exorcised in the third part oniy in <;j(/c7i: time, doubh quick lime, and thortiH; tho iLStructor will cause them to execute suc- cessively, at these different gaits, the march to the front, tho facing about in marching, tho march by the flank, the wheels at the halt and iu marching, and the changes of dlr ction to the side of the guide. .'JSt. The instructor will iutorm tho recruits that at the command march, they will always move off in quick lime, Tinless this command should bo preceded by that of double quick. To march to the f rout. 325. The rank being correctly alignet*, when the in- structor shall wifh to cause it to march by tho front, ho will place a well instructed man on the right or the lelt according to the side on which ho may wi- h th guide to be, and command : 1. Squad, foricard. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. Maech. 326. At the command march, the rank will step off smartly with the left foot ; the guide will take care to march straight to the front, keeping his shoulders always in a square with that line. 327. The instructor will cbiorvo, in msrching to the front, that the mru touch lightly tlio elbow towards the side of tho guide ; that they do not open cut the left el- bow, nor the right arm ; that they yield to pressure com- ing from the side of the guide, and resi.xt that coming from the opposite side; t'.iat they recover by insensible degrees the slight touch of the elbow, if lost ; that they maintain the head direct to the front, no matter on which side the guide may be ; and if found before or behind the alignment, that the man in fault corrects himself by shortening or lengthening tho step, by degrees, almost Insensible. 328. The instructor will labor to cft"sethe recruits to compreheod that the alignment can only be prcseiTed, in marching, by tho rognlnrity of the step, tho touch of the elbow, and the maiatenance of the shoulders in a square with the line of direction ; that if, lor example, tho stop of some be longer than that of others, or if some march faster than others, a separation of elbows, and a loss of the alignment, would be iuevitable ; that if (it bt-ing re- quired that the head should be direct to the front) they do li ot strictly ob.serve the touch of elbows, it would bo impossible for an individual to jndge whether he marches Abreast with his bis neighbor, or not, and whether thero be not i>n interval between them. W 329. The impulsion of the quick step having a tendency to mak-> men too easy and free in their movements, the instructor will bo careful to regulate the cadence of this step, and to liabituate them to preserve .always tho oroct- ness of the body, and tho due length of the pace. 3o0. Tho men being well ostablisbed in the principles of the direct march, tho instructor will exercise them in msrching obliquely. The rank being in march, the in- structor will command : 1. liigJd (or left) ohliquehj. 2. Masch. 331. At the second command, each man will make a half face to the right (or left), and will then march straight forward in the new direction. As the men no longer t.uch elbows, they will glance along the shoulders of the nearest files, towards tho side to which they are obliqu- ing, and will regulate their steps so that the shoulders Bliall always Vo behind that of their next neighbor ou that side, and that his head shall conceal tho heads of tho other men in tho rank. Besides this, tho mea should preserve the samt) length of pace, and the samedegrea of obliquity. 332. The instiuctor 'wishing' to jesumo^ the primitive direction, will command; 1. Forward. 2. Mabch, 333. At the second command, each man will make a half face to the left (or right) and all will then march straight to the front, conforming to the principles of tho direct march. To march to the front indoidjle quiclc time. 334. Whan the seTeral principles, heretofore explained, have become familiar to the recruits, and th?y shall bo well established in the position of tho body, the bearing of arms, and the mechanism, length and swiftness of the step, the instrnctor will pass from qvick to double quick time, and the reverse, observing not to make them march obliquely in double quick time, till thoy are well estab • lished in tho cadence of this step. 3;-!5. The squad being at a march in quick time, the instru'.tor will command : 1. Double' qiiick. 2. Mabch. 330. At the command marm, which will^be given when either foot is coming to the ground, the squad will step off in double quick time. Tho men wil endeavor to fol- low the principles laid down in tlio first part of this book, and to preserve tho alignment. 337. When the instrnctor wishes ths squad to resume th: step in quick time, he will command : 1. Quick time. 2. March, f 38. At the coramard march, which will be given when either foot is coming to the ground, tho squad will retake the step in quick time. 339. The squad being in loarch, the instructor will halt it by the commands and nuans j reacribed Nos. 93 and 99. The command halt will be given an instant be- fjre the foot-^s ready to bo placed on the ground. 34ii. The squad being in march in double quick tioio, the instructor will occasionally cause it to mark time by the commands proscribed No. 2-10. The men will then mark double quick time, without altering the cadence of tho step. He will also cause them to pass from tho direct to the oblique step, and reciprocally, conforming to what has boon prescribed Ko. 330, and following. 16 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER- -PART III. S41. Tho gqaad being at a halt,lbein«troctor vrlll caiBo it to niHrrh Id donblp (juick lime, by preceding tho com- inaud march, by daiije quUk. 34'i. The* inctrartor vill«DdeftTor to regulate well the cadeocc of this 8t«p. To face alout in marching. 313. If the squad be tnarcUiDg In quick time, or double quick time, and iho ioatructur ahould wish to march it ia retreat, ho will ^bmrnanJ: 1. Squad rijhIaUml. 2. MxncQ. 311. At the comnr.:. I .nardi, vbich M'ill be gircn at tlio InstHtit the left fuo: .a ccming to tho ground, iho recruit Kill briiig this foot to the ground, ajd, turning on It, will (kco to the roar ; ha v ill theu place the ri^ht foot in the new direction, and step off with the lett fool. To march lacJ:irnr(Js. 315. The gqnad being at a halt, if the instructor thould wish to march it in tho hock alep, ho will command: 1. Sqitad baclward. 2. Guide Ufl (or rigid ) 3. Maboh. 346. The bark step will bo exccntcfl by tho ucans pre- acribed No. 247. ^ 347. The instructor, In this step, will bo watchful that the men do not lean on each other. 348. As tb'' march to the front in quick time should only be e\ fnled at Miou'dored arm", iho instructor, iu order noi to fatigue the men too much, and aUo to pro- vent negligence in gait and position, will halt Iho squad frcm time to time, and caus" arms to bo < rcI>.Tcd. 31U. In marching at double quick time, the men will always carry their pieces ou the .tight ehoulder, or at a trail. This rule is general. a60. If iho iubtrucior shall wish the pieces carried at a trail, he will give the command iraiV oritis, bi'fore the command double quick. If, on the contrary, this com maud be uot given, the men will uhift iheir pieces to the right shoulder at tho commaLd doulle quick. In either case, at the commdnd halt, the men will briog their pieces to the posiliuu of sVoiUder arms. This rule is gen- eral. Leseon III. Tlie march hy Ihejlank. 351. The rank being at a halt, and correctly aligned, the instructor will commund: 1. Stpiad, right— ¥Ace. 2. Forward. 3. MAitcn. 352. At tho last part ef the first command, the rnnk | wi 1 lare to tli« right; the oven numbered men, ai':er facing to th" right, Will step quickly to the right aide of the oud numbeied men, the lalnre himsilf Fometinies in its rear, halt, and aiiOer it t>i paru ftlteeu nr twei t r pares, tho Wt. tor to see whether Iho ri-Mi cover each other »ccnmt.'Iy. u5S, When he shnll w.^h to halt the rank, niarchlng by the flank, and cau^d it to ttx^ to the front, bo will commaud: 1. Fquad. ■!. Halt. 5. rnoxT. 350. At the second cemniand, Ihe rnnk will halt, and af- terwards no man will stir, nlihoiigh he mav h'.iv,- lost hia dirlatcc. This prohibitiuu is neces-iary, to hntiituatethe men toacoustuut prescrratio i i.f their disUnoes. 300. At tho third c nimaud, e;icli man will front by facing to the left, if marchinu by the right flnnk, au'.: by a face to the right, if marching by th« left flaiik. Tho rear rank ni<»n will at tho kiiuiu time mi)Vjn hav<9 become ace uilomed to march- ing by the flank theiuslructor willcau»e tin ni to change direction by file ; lor this purpose, he ^i ill commacd : 1. By file Icjt (or right). 2. MARca. ?.C2. At tho command march, the first file wiil change direction to the leil (or iiglit)iiidogcribiiiK a small are of a circle, and will th-n march straight forward ; Uie two men of this file, in wheeling, will keep up the touch of the elbows, and tho iji:iu..ulhe side to which the wheel' is mnde, will shorleii the first thn e or four ••leps. £ach filo will ci.>ttie succesniiely to wheel ou the same spot where tha> which preceded it wh^'eled. 'Mi. The instructor will also cause the squad to fa^o bv the rijht or lefi fiauk in marching, and fur this pur. potie will commaud : 1. Squad by the right (or l-ft) flank. 2. ilAECii. 304. At tho second command, which will be given ft little before olth -r foot couios to the ground, the recruits will turn the body, plant the foot tuut is raised iu the now direction, iiud step off with tho other foot without alteriug the cadeuco of the step ; tho men will double or undouble rapidly. o05. If, in facing by the right or tho left flank, the squal should face t" the rear, the men will ci ine into one rank, agreeably to the principles indicatfd ho. ^00. It is to bo remimed that it is iho men who are in rear who always move up to form into Bii>t;lo rnnk, »nd in such nmbuer as never to invert tho order of tho uumhera iu tho rank. 300. If, when tho Fquad has been faced to the rear, the instructor should cauboit to laco by tho lef. flank, it is the oven numbers who will doube by m iving to the left of the odd numbers; but if by the right Ila' k, itlstheodd numbers who will double to the rij^ht of tho even num- ber-. ; 07. This lesion, like Ihn preceding one, will be prac- tised with pieces at tho shoi;Kl*r; but thj instructor may, to give relief by change, occasionally order stijtport arniH, and he will nqnire ofth" recruits marching in ibis poollion, as much rtgulaiity as in the former. Tlte inarch by the flank in double quick lime. 3r8. The principles of the march by the flank in double quick time, are the same as in quick fi i c. The instructor will give tho commands pretcribcd No 251, taking core always to give the commaud double quick before that of march. 369. He will pay the greateat attention to the cadonco of the step. SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART III. 17 370. The instructor ■will cause the change of direction. and the march by the flink, to be exe-uted in double qnick time, by the 8Hm»; commacdSj and accorciag to the Bam ' prioc'ples, as in quick time. 37'. The iiiRtriicfi^r will cause the p-'ecea to bo carried either on the rig't shoulder or at a trail. 372. The insiiuctor will sometimes march the iquad by the Qdok, without doublinc: the tiles. 37:i The priocip es of this march are the !r double qu ck time so as to clear the wheeling point, which \-t noc ssary in order that the subdivisions of a column may Chans'* direction without 1 sing their dis- tances, as will be explained in the school oi the company. 38.:. The man on the wheeling flank will take lie full step of twenty-e ght inches, or thirty-three inches, accord- ing to the g'iit. Wheeling from a halt, or on a fixed pivot. 383. The rank being at a halt, the instructor will place a well-instructed man on the wheeling flank, to conduct It, and then command : 1. By squod, right wheel. 2. March. 384. At the second command, the rank will step off with the left foot, turning at the same time the bead a little to the left, the eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men to their left; the pivot man will merely mark time in gradually turning his body, in order to conform himself to the movement ide, and each will conform himxelf to the marching fla' k— shorten his step accurding to his a;>- proximuion to tlie pivot. 386. Ihe instructor will make th« rank whof-l round the circle < noe or twice b-foe hailing, in order to cau^e the priucipleg to be the better understood, and he will be Watchful that the centre does not break. 387. Ue will cause ihe wheel to the left to be executed according to the same principles 383. When the in trnctor shall wish to arrest the Wheel, he will command : 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3S9. At the Hf cond commaTid, the rank will halt, and no man stir, 'ihe instructor, going to the fl »ien, and tl-.e pivot, only the space necessary to contain the other men. Ho will then command : Left (or right)— Dczfa. 390. A t this, the rank wiil pluf-e itsc If on the al-'gntri'lit of ttio two men establis-heJ astheba&is, inconftrmity with the principles pnscribed. 391. The instructor will next crmtMand From, which will be executed as prescribed. No 314. Bemarks on the principles of the wheel from a halt. 392. Turn a little the hend toicirds th' marching finnk, ond fix the (j/es on the line of the eyes of the men who are o . t'.al tide; Because, otherwise, it would be impossible for each maa to regulate the length of his S'ep so as to c-^-uform his own movement to that of the marching fliuk. Touch lighthj the elbow of the next man towards the pivot; In order that the files may not open out in the wheel. Built pressure that comer from the sids cf the marchirg flank; Because, if this principle be neglected, the pivot, wMch ought to be a fiied pont, in wheels from a hilt, mi^lit be pushed out of its place by pressure. Wlieeling in marching, or on a movea' le pivot. 393. When the recruits have been brought to ex^^cnfe well the wheel from a halt, they will be taught to wheel in marching. 394. To this end, the rank being in march, when the instru~tur shall vti&h to cau«e it to change direction to the reverse fliub, (to the side opposite to the guide or pivot flauk ) he will command : .1. Bight {yt left) wheel. 2. lilAKcn. 395 The first command will h^ given when the rank Is yet four paces from the marching point. 396. At the second commana. th.- wheel will be executed n the same manner as from a h ilt, except thic the tech of the elbow will remain towrds the marching fla' k (or side of the guide) instead of the side of the actual p vot ; that the p. vot mtn, instead cf m-rtly turning in his place, will conform himself to the niovtm-nt of the mirching flank, feel light'.y the elbow ot the ne.xt man, take iteps of full nine inches, and thus gain grour d for- ward in deecrib i g a small curve so as to clear the point of the wheel. The middle <.l the runk wili bend slitht y to the rear. As Foon as the movement shall commence, the man who conducts the march ng flank will cast Lis eyes on the grjund over whi^U ho will have io pass. 397. The wheel being ended, the instructor will com- mand : 1. Forward. 2. March. 398 The first command will be pronounced when four paces ure yet required to comoletc thechai geocireciiaii. :99. At the coram and marc7(, which will be given at the instant of completing the wl eel, the man wt;o cos- ducts th? marching flmk wi Idirec- himself 8trRi..:t.t lor- wanl : the piv»t mau and all the rank will rniake the step of twenty-eigkt inches, and bring the i ead direct to the front. Turning, or change of direction to ihe side tf the guide. 4C0. The change of directicu to the side rf the guide, in marching, will be executed as follows: Xho iuBtructor will command: 18 SCHOOL OF TEE COMPANY. 1. Lffl (or ri^hi) tum. 2. MABcn. 401. The flret cotnnian ft h.'\nd, the barn-l to the front and inclining it forward, will rest it od tUo stack. 411. Tho men of both rnnl?" hnvlrg taken tbe position of the soldier without arms, the instructor « ill ccmnund; 1. ZJrcaJk ran/.*. 2. 3lAECn. 7b resume armi. 412. Both ranks being re-f.rir.'d in rear of their staeki, tbe luatructor will coaimaud : I rnJ.c— Arms. I 413. At this command, the rear rank man of every odd I numbered file will withdraw his j>iece from the ttnclc ; j tho front rank man ot every even file will seizj his own ' piece witli the left hand end that of tlie man onlii:, tifiht with his right hand, bnth above Iho lower band, the rr rank man ol the even file will seir.o hii: piece with tho 1 riirht hand below fho lower band; those two men will i raise up the stack to lco!ien tho rammers ; the front rai:k I nmn of every odd file will liicilitale Ihe disetigng' m.nt of j tue rammers, if nocesfary. by drawing them out slightly I with the lefi baud, and will rrc ivo his piece from the ■ bai^d of the man ne.xt on bis left ; tho four men will re- ' talce the position of the eclJIer at ordr arms. iND cr Tus fcncoi. of the soipies. TITLE THIRD. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. General Iiulcs and division of the School cf Ihe Compani/ 1. Instruction by company will always precede that by battali "U, aLcl the o) ject being to prepare the suidlera for the higher school, tho exorcises of detail by company will be strictly aobcred to, as well in respect to priuciples aa the order of progro^ision herein preecribed. 2. There will be attached to a company undergoing elementary Jiistructiin, a captain, a coverli g eeigiant, and a certain number ot file clos'er.^, the whole jiosied iu the manner indicated. Title First, aud, occordinp to tho same Title, tho officer charged with the exerciss cf such company will herein bo denumiDated the inahiictor. 3. Tho School of the Company will bo dnided into six le.vsons, aud each lesson will cumiirehend five articles, us follows : Lessok X. 1. To open ranks 2. Alignments iu open ranks. .'). Manual of arnss. •t. To close ranks. 6. Alignments, and manual of oruis in cloetJ tanks. Leseon it. 1. To load In fcnr times and at will. '.I. To fire by company. .3. To fire by file. 4. To fire by rank. 6. To Ore by the renr rank. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON I. 10 Lesbon IH. 1. To niarcU In line of battle. 2. To halt the company m*rcbing in line of battle, an to align it. 8. Oblique march In lino of battle. 4. To luark time, to march in double quick time, end the back step. 5. To march in retreat in lino of battle. Lesson 1Y. 1. To march by the flank. 2. To change direction by filo. 3. To halt the company marchirg by the flank, and to face it to the front. 4. The company being in march by the flank, to form it on the right or left by file into line of I attle. 6. The company marching by the flank, to form it by company or platoon into line, and cauae it to face to the right and left in marching. Lesson V. 1. To break into column by platoon either at a halt, or wliilo marching. 2. To mnrch in column. ' 0. To change direction. 4. To halt the column. 6. Being in column by platoon, to form to the right or left into line of baitle, cither at a halt or marching. Lesson TI. 1. To break into platoons, and to re-form the com- pany. 2. To break files to the rear, and to cause them to re- enter into line. 3. To march in column t» routi, and t'S execute the movements incident thereto. 4. Countermarch. 6. Being in column by platoon, to form on the right or left int J line of battle. 4. The company will always be formed in two ranks. The instructor will then cause the files to be numbered, and for this purpose will command ; In each ranh— Count Twos. 6. At this command, the men count in each rank, from right to left, pronouncing in a loud and distinct voice, in ihj same tone, without hurry and without turning the head, cue, liro. Recording to the place which each one oc- cupies. He will also cause the company to be divided into platoons and sections, taking care that the first platoon is always compi sed of an even number of files. G. The instructor will bo as ciear and concise as possi- ble in hrs expl mations ; he will cause faults of detail to be rectified by the captain, to whom he will indicate thoiii, if the captain should not have himself observed them; and the instiuctor will not otherwise interfere, unle-s the captain should uot well comprehend, or should badly execute his intentions. 7. Comp .sure, or presence of mind, in liim who com- mands, and in those who obey, being the first moans of order in a btdy of troops, the instructor will labor to habituate the company to this essential quality, and will himself give the example. LESSON FIEST. Aeticle First. To open raiils, 8. Tho company boinj at ordered arms, the ranks and filo cl jsers well aligned, when tho instructor fhallwinh to cause th' ranks to be opened, he will direct the left guide t.> pl^e himself on the left of the front rank, which being cxocutei, hu will command : 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder— kn^s. 4, To tha rear open order. 0. At tho fourth command, the covering sergeant, and the left guide, will step off smartly to the rear, four pace* from the front rank, in order to mark the aligrment of th • rear rank. They will judge this distance by the ey«, without counting the steps. 10. The instructor will place himself at the same tlm« on the right flank, in order to observe if these t*o non- commissioned officers are on a line parallel to the front rank, and if nepessary, to correct their positions, whi h being executed, he will command : ^ 5. Maech. 11. At this command, the front rank will stand fast. 12. The rear rank will step to tho rear, without count- ing the steps, and will place themselves on the alignment mark(d for this rank, conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the soldii-r, No. 321. 13. The covering sergeant will align the rear rank on the left guide placed to mark the left of this rank. 14. The file closers will march to the rear at the sams time with the rear rank, and will place themselves two paces from this rank when it is aligned. 15. The instructor seeing the rear rack aligned, will command : 6. Front. 10. At this command, the sergeant on (he left of th« rear rank will return to his place as a file closer. 17. The rear rank being aligned, the instructor will di- rect the captain and the covering sergsant toobsfrve tho I men in their respective ranks, and tocoirect, if nceessaiy, I tho positions of persons and pieces. I Aeticle Second. Alignments in open ranis. 18. Tha ranks being open, the inetructor will, in tho first exercises, align the ranks, man by man, the better to inculcitte the principles. 19. To effect this, he will cause two or fuur men on th» right or left of each rank to mnrch two or three pac#« forward, and, after having aligned them, ccmmand : By fih right (or left)— VRtss. 20. At this, tho men of each rank will move up succes- sively on the alignment, each man being preceded by his no ghbor in the same rank, towards the basis, by two paces, and having correctly aligned himself, will cast his eyea to the front. 21. Successive alignments having habituated tliofol- diers to dress cc^rectiy, the inttructor will cause the ranks to align themselves at once, forward iind backward, Eomt times in a direction parallel, and scmetimesin cn« oblique, to the original direction, giving, in each cose, two or lour men t • servo as the basis of Hligament to each rank. To efl'ect which, he ■fiM cc mmand : 1.': Jiight^ipr left)— D&Kss. 2. Front. 1. Eif/ht (or left) backward.— DViisS. 2. Feont. 22. In oblique alignments, in opened rarks, the men of the lear rank will not seek i> cever their file leaders, as the Biile object of tho exercise is to teach them to al gn themselves correc.ly in their respective ranks, in iho different directions. ■^3 In the several alignments, thecaftTln will superin- tend the front rank, and ihe coverin.' Pcrgeant thy reai rank. For this purpose, they will place themselves on ths sidi by which (ho ranks are dressed. 24. In oblifiue slignmonts, the men will conform (h« line cl their shoulders to the new direction of their rai k, and will place (heniBelves on tho aligrment fs has 1 eea prescribed in the ichool of the soldier, No. 317 or No. 321, accordincT as the new direction shall bo in front or rear of tho oriainal one. 26. At the end of each alignment, tho captain and the covering sergeant wi 1 pass along the front of the ranks to correct tho poaitiona of persona and arms. 20 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON II. Aktioli Tbikd. Manual of arm*. S9. Tlie mnks l>eine open, the tnatract^r will place bi.'Q-ell ill u pr)-Uion to see tbc rankf.iind will command the muantl of arms in the followiog order : Prntni a.rmt. Orier armt. Groiinrl >iri)U. Ji i*e arms. Stippirl armi. fix bayonet. Chirgt h |Ouef. Trail armt. Viifii hay HcU. 8:Cure amu. BheuUUr armt. t'houltUr am*, ahmd'ier artnt. ShonVitr armt. Shoulder armt. Hhou'.drr armt. Shouhlcr armt. Shoulder armt. Load in nine titnu. 27. The invtruntor will take care that the poeitlon of the boiy, of Uio f-et, and vi the piece, be alnaii exact, and that tbc liuies in.- briskly exocu'cd and clcsa to the por«on. Abticlb Fourth. To dote ranl.i. 2S. Tnu maDuu! of arma being eude4, the Instructor wil! coraiuand : 1. Cl'jxe'order, 2. March. 20. At Ifee CDmmi'^d march, the rear rank will close np in quick time, each mau uirrctlDg himself on his tilo leader. Abticle Fifth. Alignmenli and manual of armt in cloicd rankt. 30. The ranks beioi; closed, the instructor will caust to b^ px'-cTod paralel aufl obliqne iitignmnnts by the right and left, forward and backward, otiservinjc to plaeo always two i ber i tiio Iroat rank aligned, bo will command Fro.nt, and ra itify, af;erwird<, if uecussary, the alignment of I be other m^n hv the means prescribed in the school of the soldi T. N«. 3:;0. The rear rauk will conform to the alignment of the front rank, superintended by thecover- ioir feref«nt. 33. The ranks being steady, the Instructor will place himsi'lf on the fl»nk to verify their alignment. He will als'i see that each rear rank man covera accurately his Hie le»di-r. CI. In ohHqTio nll;2rrimenf8, the instructor will observe what in preBcribed. Ko. 24. 8.1. I'l all ."tlignm'iifs, the file olri«'"-s will preserve the di»ttnco of two paces from the rear i/mk. 36. T e iilignmeuts being endei >he instructor will ca"S9 t ) be executed the manual of ?.rr n. S7. Th» Inntructor, wishing to i ^i iiiility, or to remain in thuir places. 41. Th» instnirtor m»y. also, when h« fhall Judge proper, canse arms to be sucktK), which will be execated at prescribed, sibod of the seldier. LE:;SO.N SECOND. 42. The tnitrnctor, wishing to paM to the second les- son, will canse the company to take armS| if stacks have been formed, and command : 1. AUeniion. 2. Ompani/. 3. 5^<3«M»r-AB.Ms. 43. The instructor will then cause loadings and flriogs to be executed in the foUowiug order: Articli Tirst. To load in four timet and at tciU. 44. Loading in four timet will be commanded and exe- cuted as prvscribeii in the school of the soldier. No. 25li and following. The instructor will cau«e this exercise to be often repeated, in succession, before pissing to loading at will. 45. Loading at will will be commanded and executed as prescribed in the schocd of tVe soldier. No. 256. lo priming when loading in fotir limes, and aUo at will, f'^t captain at. J covering sorgeaLt will half fwce to the right with the !n n, and fa e to the frout when the man next to them, respectively, brings his piece to th" shoulder. 46. The instructor will labor to the utmost tocaupeths men. In the different loadings, to execute what haa been prescribed in the Bch.>ol of t:ie soldier, Nos. £67 and 258. 47. Loading at will, being that of battle, and C' nre- qnently t«e one with which it is raobt important t» render the men familiar, it will cUini preference In the exe'cises the moment the men be well entablishc d in the principles. To these they will be hruupht by degrees, so that every man may We able to load with c.0. Ac the second comnmnil, the cautaiu Mill ai!d ; 1. Company; 2. Rbact ; 3. Aim; 4. Kiac; 6 Load. III. At the command Zuad, the men u ill load theirpiecas, and then take the pobiCioM uf ready, as prescribed in the school of the soldier. 62. The captain will immediately recommence the firing, by the cummauds : 1. Company. 2. AiM. 3. FlBE. 4. Load. 63. The firing will be thus continued until the signal to cease filing is sounded. 64. The captain will sometin-.es cause aim to betaken to the right and lett, simply observing to pronounce rt|;U (or left) oblijue, before the command aim. Article Tninn. r/u> Fire by file. 56. The instructor wishing to cause the flro by file to b« executed, will command : 1. Fire by file. 2. Compani/. 3. llEADT. 4. Commence firing. 66. The third and fourth commands will be executed as prescribed in the BchuoJ of the soldier, No. 275 and fol- lowing. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSOK III. 21 67. The fire will be commenced by the right file of the company; the next file will take aim at the iustant the first brings down pieces to re-load, and so on to the left; bnt this progression will only be observed in the first dis charge, aftfir which each man will re-load and fire with- out regulating hira-elf by others, conforming himself to what is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 280. Abticlk Fourth. To Fire by rank. 68. The instructor wishing the fire by rank to be executed, will command : 1. fire itj ranJs. 2.' Company. 3. ReAIiT. 4. Jiear rank— Am. 6. Fibb. C. Load. 69. The fifth and s'xth commands will be executed as Is pte'cr.bed in the school of the soldier, No. 285 and following. 60. When the inptrtictcr sees one or two pieces iu the rear rank at a ready, he will command : 1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fibe. 4. LOAD. 61. The firing will be continued thus by altornato ranks until the bignal is given to cease tiling. G'2. The instructor will sometimes cau'e aim to bs taken to th'> right and loft, conforming to what ia prescribed No. 54 63. The instructor will cause the firing tj ceise, whether by company, by file, or by ranV. by soundiog the signal lo cease firing, and at the iustant this sound coram nces, thj men will cease to fire, conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the si.ldier. No. 282. 61. The signal to cease firii'g will bi>»lway8 followed by a bugle note ; at which sound, the captain and covering sergeant will promptly resume their plac s in line, and will rectify, if neceasary, the alignment of ths ranks. 65. In this pchoal, except wheapowdpris used, the sig- nal to. ease firing will b» indicated by the command, cttse firing, wliich will be pronounced bv the instructor whfiu he wishei the semblance of firinu; to cease. 66. The commandpos/j will be likewise substituted, un- der similar circumstances, for the bugle note employed as the signal for the return of Ihv. captain and covering ser- g*ant to their places in line, which commaud will be given when the instructor sees the men have brought their pieces to a shoulder. 67. Th9 fire by file being that which is most frpnuently ns d against an -nemy, it is highly important that it be rendered perfectly familiar to the troops. The i.,B»ructor will, therefore, give it almo-it exclusive preference, and labor t.i cause the men to aim with care, and always, if possible, at some particular object. As it is of the utmost Importance that the men should aim with i rec sion in Cattle, this principle will be rigidly enforced in tlie exer- cises for the purposes of instruction. Akttcle Fifth. To Fire hy the reir rank, 68. The instructor will canse the several fires to be exe- ctitod to the rear, that is, by the rciir rank. To effect this, he will cummand: 1. Face by the rear rank. 2. OtmjiJtv'. 3. About — Face. 69. At the first command, the captain will st^p out and place himself near to, and facing the right file of his company; the covering sergeant, and file cIosBrs, will pass quickly through the captain's interval, and place them- selves faced to the rear, the covering sergeant a pace be- hind the captain, -ind the file (losers two paces frum the f out rank opposite to their places in line, each passiug behind the coveting sergeant. 70. At the third command, which will be given at the instant the last file closer shall have passed through the interval, the company will face about; the captain will place himself ia his interval in the rear rank, now become the front, and the covering sergeant will cover him in the front rank, now become the rear. 71. The company having ficed by the rear rank, B, it Is particularly leconmiended that the men observ,', iu un- cocking, whether smoke escapes from the tube, v>h:ch is a certain indication that the piece has been diecbarged ; but if. on the contrary, no smoke escapes, the soldier, in such case, instead ot re-loading, will pick and pr)me again. If believing the load to be discharged, the sol- dier should put a sec( nd cartridge in hie piece, he ought, at least, to perceive it in rammiug, by the height of the load ; anil he would be very culpable, should he put in a third. The instructor will always cause arras to be in- spected after firing with cartridges, in order to observe if the fault has been committed, of putting three cart- ridges, without a discharge, in the same piece, in w licb case the ball screw will be applied. S3. It sometimes happens, when a cap has missed fire, that the tube is fo nd stopped up with r» hard, white, and compact powder; in this case, >iii kIi.^ will be dis- pensed with, anda new cup substituted ie.'S lor the old one. LESSON THIBD. Aeticle Fibbt. To advance in line of bailie. 84. The company being in line of battle, and correctly aligned, when the instructor shall .•.sh to exercife it in marching by the front, he will af^ure himself that the (■boulders of the captain and covering sergeant are per- fectly in the direction of their respective racks, and that the sergeant accurately covers the captain; the in- structor will then place himself twenty-tive or thirty 22 SCHOOL OP THE COMi'ANY— LESSON III. paces 1q frcntof tb«iD, face to the fmu, and place him- Mir exactly on the proloogation of the Hoc pansiog be. twe«n their be«l8. 85. The instructor, being aligned en the directing file, wili command : 1, Company, /orwaid. 86. At this, a serf^oant, prprioubly designated, will move nix paces in adrauce of the captain ; the iastrcc< tor, from the position proscribed, will correctly align this K«rgoaDton the prolojogatioa of the dircctini; file. 87. This advanced sergeant, who is to be charged with tbt dirint all thf prin- ciples of the march in lino are strictly observed ; he will generally bo on the directing (lank, in a position to ob- serve the two rank-, and the (anils they may mniinlt ; he W'li 8ome>imeB halt behind the directing lile dnring Rome thirty successive eteps, in order to judge whether the direiting sergeant, or the directing file, deviate from the perpendicular. Atncui Sbmhd. To halt lk$ company, nnrchinj in lint c/ laUU, and (• alijn iL j 00. The iBatrnctor, wishing to halt the company, «tll . command: I 1. Cbmfany. 2. Halt. I 100. At the second command, the company will bait ; I the directing sergeant will remain in advance, nniess ' ordered to return to the line of tile iloM-rs. The com-. I pany b>-ing at halt, the instructor may advance the firtt { throe or four files < n the side of direction, and align the I company on that basis, or he may ccnfli.o himself to causing the alignment to be rectifir-d. In thi" last case, he will command: Giptain, rccli/ij Uic ali-.ni"tcia. The captain will direct the covering sergeant to attend to the ; rear rank, when c>ach, glancing his cyee along bis rank, , will promptly rectily it, couformiug to what if pre* scribed in the school of the soldier, Ko. 320. Abticle Thibd. Olliqtte march in line of haUle. j 101. The company bciug in the direct march, when the instructor shtiU wish to cause it to march olliqnely, i he will command: ' 1. lii.jJil (or Ufl) olUquc. 2 Marcu. ! 102. At the command march, the company will take the oblique step. The mi-n will accurately obserTe the prin- , ciplcs prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 331. I The rear rank men will preserve their distances, and I march in reitr of the man next on the right (or left) of j their hahitnal file lo'iders. j 103. When the instructor wishes the direct mirch to i be resumed, be will command : I 1. Forward. 2. MiKcn. I 101. At the command tiiarc?i, the company will rosnmo I the direct maich. The instructor will move brilkly twenty paces in front of the captain, and facini; the company, will place himself exfictly in the proloug/tiou of tliu cuptuia and covering sergeant; und then, by a (i^o, will move the directing sergeant on the same line, if be be not already on it; tl e latter will imn ediately take two points on the ground between himself and the instnictor, and ns ho advauccF, will tuke new points of direction, as is expln'ned No. ti'J. 105. In the ub ique march, t!ie men i:ot having the touch of elbows, the giii Je will alwayj bo on th-< side to- wards which the obliqu- i^ made, without any indication to that elfoct being giviii ; and when the direct march is rr-Hiinied, the guide will bo, ei|ually with perpendicular line to tho front with him. while following a piu-allel Uireclion. 107. During the perf riuiii.te of the march, the in. Btnut r will be walchlul thnt the men follow parallel directions, in conforiniug to tho principles proper bet n the school of tho soldiar, for preserving the general nlign- iiu-ut; wi enevi.r th^ men lose the alignmeut, be uill be t'vreful that they regaiu it by lengthsuiug or short-uing tli«.':t)e mircU in double quick t.'mo, the in- Btructor will command : 1. Doulle qu'ck. 2. ^Iaech. 112. The coromund march will bo prnnounc.d at the InFt K t iiher foot 13 coming to the proiind. 113. The resume quick time, the inttructor will com- mand : 1. QuicTc time, C. HiBCB. 114. The command march will be pronounced at the in st>nt either foot is comiut; to tba^oanluc«i is litie ofbittle. 139. The initrnrfor will cnnse the princijilos of the march b> the ll«uk to l>e obc^rted, Id piuriug hiniti-if, peDtliog the march, as prescriUd Id th<- schuol of the •uldier. Nu. 357. IIJ. Tha itittructor will cuDse t)ie march by (he left flai.k l> b* executed by Lbe snme commauus, sub^titiiiinR left t r riyfU; the raukn will d^iublv m hHS been piesciitK-d lu the ^cu<>ul fur the solilier. No. 34. the roar rank will ■iilv-tt

the left, the left »;uide will place himaelf ut the bead ol th« front rank; tbf captain will pnx't rii|iidl> to th« left, aiid by the flauk. and either Id march, or at a ha.t, wbun the iuatruciur khall wish to caiue it to wheel by file, he will command: 1. ByfiJe l« to the side nf tha reir rai.k, the front rank man will wheel in tlie Btep cf twenty eight inches, and the fourth man will coiifurm himwif to the movem nt by describing a tliort arc of a ciicle as has been ^^platned. Kach file will ci m<' tn wheel on the same ground where th.it which prtcuUcd it Wh«»el<;d. 144. The instructor will see that the wheel be exocnfed according to these ; -intiples, in order that the dia anco between the ftles ii .;, .iluays be preserved, and thattheru be no check or hi:- iniice at the whoelicg point. AitTiCLK Third. To halt the company marching liy Ihejlanl:, and to face it to tite frunt. 145. To effost these objects, the inetrustor will com- mand : 1. Company, 2. Halt. 3. Fbost. 146. The second and third commands will be executed M prescribed in the school of the soldier, Hoe. 369 and 3U0. As soon as the files have uudoublod, tho rear rank will close to its proper distance. The captain anil cover- ing serpeant, as well as the left guide, if the march be by the left flank, will return to their habitual places in line at the ii.-i.nt the company faces to tho front. 147. J !i- uintructor way then align tho company by ouo of tho mtui.b proscribed, N^i. 100. Abticle Focbth. The compani/ being in march Uj IheJlanJ;, (o form it on the riylU (ur kfl) by file into line uf buttle. HC. If the comi-iany be marching by the right flani, the instrtictor will command : 1. On the rirjht, by file into line. 2. Mabcii. 149. At the command viarch, tho rear rank men doubled will mark time; the captain and the covering 8ert:eHnt will turn to the right, march straight t( rward, and be halted by t'le iusiriictor when they shall have parsed at least six paces beyond the rank of file closrm ; the cup tain wil place himself correclly on the line of I'Uttle, and will direct the Hliiznmeut as tho men ol the front rank auccesHtTcly ArriTe: the sergeant will place himbelf be- hind the raptnio at the ''«:tance of the rear rack : the two men on the i i^ht I'f t);i- iroLt rsnk doubled, wil continca to march, and p-seirg beyond the covering rerpeant and the captain, will turn to the riglit ; after tiirniig. they wi.| coBtitiue to march ellow to e liiw and dirrci hcm- seiTes towariis the line >.if battle, but when they shall ar- rive at two pared fr< m this line, the even oumtMr will hhorten the step so ihai the odd number may precede him on the line, ih" cer placing hllu^ell l>y the bide and on i)ie lefc of the captain; the eteu number will afterwards oblique to thu left, and place hinitelf on tha left ol the vdd uuiiiiier ; the uex two men ol the frcut rank doutjled, will puss in he sane DiaLner behind ihe two flrnt, iHrn tlien to tho ripht. and place Ihemstlves, nrcoiding to the means Juit osplalned. to thi left and by the Hide if, he two men already eatal lii-htd I'lj tl i iiio ; the remaining fllea of this rat.k will follow in sncrersion, and bo furuM-d to the lelt in the same n sneer. 1 lie mr rank doubled will execute the moven ent in the maui.er all! ady explained r>r the front rank, taking care not to rominence the movement until four men of the Iront rank are established on the l.ne of battle ; the re^ir rai k men, KM they arrive on the line, will cover iccurately their file leadeis. 16U. If the company be marching by the left flank, the ins luctor will laUAe it to lonu by tile on the lelt in'o line of battle, aec 'tdibg to the same princij les ano ly the rnme conimands, bubsiituiine thoiuiiicaiion left fvr right. lu ttiis case, the cdd uiimlers will sboittn the step, so that the even uiimbeis may precede ihcm on the line. 1 he capt lin, |il»ced on ihe lelt i f the fri ir. rank, and tbo lelt g' ide, will return to their peaces in line of battle by order of th.' instructor, alter thecouii.au> shalll). formed andaligne.l. 151. To enable the men tho better to comprehend the mcchaiiisiii ol thih movement, the instrucior will a' first cuu.eit to be ex cuted cei aiately by each rank doubled, and afterwatds by ihe two rimka united and c'oiibled. 162. The iuttructor will iiliu-e himself on the liue of battle, and without the polut where the riglit or lelt is to rest, iu ori.er to establish the bKhu of the alignment, and •iterwaids, he will follow up the mo^rmmt to oasure himself hat each fiie conforms itsuli to what is pre- set i bed Ko. 149. Articlc Finn. Tlie company being in marcA by the flank, to form it by compuny. or by platoon, into line, and to cauto it to fact tu the right and left in marching. 153. The company 1 eing in march by Ihe right fi'tnk, the instructo. will order tho cnptain to form it into line ; the captain will immediately command : 1. By company, into lint. 2. Mabco. 151. At tho comrrard march, the covering sergeant will continue to march straijibt lot ward; the men will ad- vance tho right shoulder, take the double quick Step, ond move into lino, by the shortest route, taking care to un- dout'luthe files, and to come on the line one alter tho other. l/)5. Ab tho front rank men succecsively arrive ia line with the coveriiij; ferj:eaiit, they w ill take from him the step, and then turn tboir ryen to the front. 150 The men of tho reiir rank will cnnfo-m to the movements < f their respective fie lesders, but wilhoit cudeavoriug to ariivu in liuuat the same time wiih the latter. l.'i?. At tho i: slant the movement begins, the captain will face to his company in rrrer to follow up the execu- tion ; and, us soon as the company is formed, he will com- mand, guide left, place- himself two paces before the cen- tre, factj to tho front, and lake the step of the company. 158. At the Command guide lefl,x\w second serKeant will pr imi.tly place hiinsell in the front rank, on the lelt, to eerve as gi.ide, and the covering sergeant who is ou the oppo-ite flank will remain there. 159. When the company mardies by tho left flank, tlils movement \n ill b executed by tho same commaa^i) and SCHOOL OF TUE COMPANY— LESSON V. 25 a-coriliup; to (bo aatni pvinoiples; tin coropiny boing formed, the oaptjin >\ill cummand guide right, and pluce hiimolf ill froHt of liis compiiuy as ibjve; Iho covoriug 8 Ti; ant wh ■ is oji the iigbt of tlio front rai.k will pervo aa i^uldo, luid the second uurgeant placed ou the left flank will reiii.iiu there. )G). ThuB, in a column by compiiny, ripht or left in front, ilie coveiinE; serireant nnd the sccund sereeant of eaiU company will always be placid on the right and lu t, rt-spBi'tively, ol tlie front rank ; they will bodenom- inatod ri'jlit ijiiitlt; and Ifft r/iiide, and the oBe or other charucd with iho direction. 101. The company being in march by the flank, if it be th9 wlah oi the iustr'io or to canno it to form pla- totius, h' will fcivo an order to that effect to the captain, wlo will couiiuaui' : 1. B>j platoon, into U»e. 2. MaIICU. IGJ. The mnvomont will bo ex"CTited by each platoon accordiDfC ti thp above principles. The captain will place himself licfore tho crrtre of the first platoim, and thii flr«i lieutenant bffore tbo ceiitro of tho secon ', pass- iuj; thr'^'ush the oi>ei)in(< made in tho centre ot the com- pany, if thomircU be by the rijiht flank, and around tho left i.f Ilia pUtoiin, if tiio maroli be bv tho left; in tliiu Ust cise, the captain will also pass around tbo left of tlio Kec«nd pi itDon iu order to pi ico himself in Iront of tho first. Both the captain and lieuton i"t, without waiting for each other, will command r/nide hfl (> r right) at tho inst'int their respi'ctive pbitcons are fomicd. H):5. At. the command guide left (or rijhl), the gni'le of each platoon will pass rapiilly to tho ludicated llark of the platoon, if not already there. 1(14. Thf- rifjht c;iiide of the company will .ilways serve as the giiid'i of the rii^ht or left ot the first p'atoon, and the lott guide of the company will serve, in like manner, as the puide of th'3 seroud platoon. 16''. Tbtia in a column, by plati on, there will bo but one guide to each platoon ; ho will ahvayi be placed f-n it< loft fl mk, if tho right be in front, aud ou the right flmk, if the left be in Iront. IGi. In these miveni"nts. tho file closers wi.l follow the platouns to which they are attachoo. 1G7. The instructor may causo ihe conipnny, marching' by tlio fli'ik, to firm by corapmy, or by platoon, into line, by hi^ ownd'rtc command<, using those pretcribod for ti;e captain. No. lo3 or ICI. lC-<. Tho iu^trictor will exercise the csmpany in pass- ing without a halt, from the march by the front, to the march by tho flank, and rociprt)cally. Iu either cii-», bo will e'liploy thrt corumanda prescTibed in tho school ot tho soldier, No. Gfc3. substi'utiDgcomjXin.v U>r sipiad. The com- pany will fico to the ri>>ht or lelt, iii in:irthin2,find the captain, the guides, and fllo closora will conform them- Bftlvas to whit is prescribed for e tch in the ii.arch by tho flank, or in tho march by tho front of a company sup- posed to be a subdivision of a column. IGJ. If, after facing to the> right or iott,iu marching, tho company find itself laaed by the rt-ar rank, tho captain will placo hims.ilf two ppcos behind the centre of the front rank, now iu the rear, the guides will pass to tne rear rauk, now leading, end tho fllo clotitr.'j will march in front of (his ronk. 170. Thaiubtrnctor, in order to avtid fatiguing the men, nn<\ to provent th' m f:om being negligent in the i osi I ion of shoulder arnii. will sometimes order support arras in marching by tho Hauk, and armj on tho right shoulder, when marcUiug in liuo. LBSSON FIFTII. ARTi:tE FinST, To hreal: into eoltnnit li/pUUoon, eitlier at a hull or in iitarch. 171. The company boing at a halt, in line of battle, (ho instructor, wishing to break it into column, by platoon to the rit^ht, will command : 'I I> np^aloon, rijht uhccl. 2. Makch. 172. At the first command, the chiefs of platofln will rapidly place thomsehes two paces before the centres of their respective platoons, the lieuti nant patsii'g around (ho left ol tho c 'Bipany. They iieed not occupy themselves w ith dressiUL', one upon the other. The coToriug sergeant will rejilace the ciptain in iho front rank. 173. At the comman 1 mavch, tlie right front rank man of each jUtoou will fico to the right, the cover ng ter- geant standing fast ; tho chief of each plaioon wilKinove rpiickly by tho .shortest line, a little beyond tho point Ht which the marching flank will rest when the wheil sh-tU be completed, face to the lato rear, and place hiu self so that tho line which ho forms with the man ou the r ght (who had faced), shall be perpendicular to that occupied by Iho company in lino of battle ; each platoon will wheel according to the p'iuciples pre^cribed for the wheel on a fi.xed pivot, and when the man who couduct^ the march- ing tlink shall approach near to the perpendicular, its chief will command : 1. Platoon.. 2. Halt. 174. At tho command hall, which will be given at the in- stant the man who conducts the marching flan): ^htll have arrived at tlirte paces fr^ m tho perpendicular, the ilitoon will hilt; the covering sergeant wil move to the point where the loft of the iirst platoon is to rest, passing bv the front raik; tho second sergeant will pl.ace himself, iu like niaiiU.3 ■, in respect to the second platoon. Kach will take carti to leave between himself and tha man on the righo of his platoon, a spice equal to its Iront ; ih-^ cap- taiu and first lieutenant will look to this, and each take cat to align tbo s-Jgeant between himself ^ud tho man of tho platoon who had faced to the riilit. 175. The guide cf each plateon, being ilias established on the perpendicular, each clii^if will pl-ice himself two p.'ices outsido of his guide, aud facing towards him, will oommaud : 3, if/i!— Dress. 17(). Tho alignment being ended, each chief of iilntoon will command, I'hoat, and place himself two paces' before its centre. 177. Tho file closers will conform themselves to the movement of their respective platoons, p'oserving always the distance of two p-iccs from the rear raiib. 178. The company will break by platoon to tho left, ac- cprdmg to the same principles. Tho inhtructor will com- mand : 1. 13;/ platoon, IcJlKhecl. 2. March. 179. Tho first coramnnd will bo executed iu tho same munner as if breaking by platoon to iho right. ISO. At the command mnrch. the loft front rank man' of each platoon will fjro ti the left, ard the platoons will wheel to tho lelt, according to the principles prei-cribed f^.r tho wheel on a fixed pivot; the chivts of platoon will conf rm to the principles indicated ^os. 173 unrl 174. 181. At tlie command halt, given by the chief of each plitoon, the covering sergeant on the rijiht of the front rank of the first platoon, and fheserond sergeant near the left of the second platoon, will each move to tho points where the right ot his platoon is to rest. The chief of each platoon '•hould be careful to align (ho sergeant be- tween himself aud the man of tlie plaioon who had faced to tho Uf., and will then commttud: HifjlU—ItRrss. 182. The platoons being ali5;ned, e.ach chief of platoon will ccjmmand, Front, and place himself opposite its centre. 1'3. The instructor wishing to break the company by platoon to tbo right, and t.i move the column forward ntter the whe»1 is ci^mpli t'd, will caution tho company to that ollcct, and command : 1. Vy platoon, right wheel. 2. llAUcn. 181. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon will movo rapidly iu front of their respective pifttoous, con- 28 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON V. forming to wh»t hu boen prescribed No. 172, and will ro- main Id thit poiition during the coutinnaLco nf tlio whoul. The cov(>rin(; iiert((-ant vrill n'jilace th« chief of tk« first platoon in tlie front rank. 185. At the rommaud nuirrh, tlio plat'xmii will wbeel to the ri(;ht, confurniiog to the principles herein preiscrihod ; the man on the pivot will not face t^) lb<> right, hot will mark time, conforming himself tu the movement of tlio marching flank : and when the in«n who is on the left of this (lank shall arrive nc«r the perpendicular, the instruc- tor will command : 3. Fonrar,!. 4. MARCH. 6. Gttuk U/l, 18G. At the fourth command, which will be givca at the ioftant the wheel in completed, the platouus will move straight to the fruut. all the men taking the Ktep of twen- ty-eight irichc'B. Tha coverii g sergeant and tlie socoiid B«rg6ant will move rapidly to the loft of their respective platoons, the former pa8t>in>; biloro the flout rauk. The leailing guide will immediately take puintx oo the ground in the direction which may bo iudioatc-d tu bim by the inclruclor. I«7. At the fifth commi\nd, the men will take the touch of tlliows lightly to the left. ISJ. 11 the gnide of the second platoon should loso his dlRlnnci', or the lino of diri-ctiiia, he will conform to the prliici|.le8 herein prescribed No«. 20"J and 203. 189. If the company be marching in line to the front, the instrnctor will cause it to brenk byi>la^Donto the right by the same commands. At the command marrh, the platoon) will wheel in the manner already explained ; the man ou the pivot will take care to mark time in his plac«, without advancing or receding; the instructor, tho chiefs of platoon, and the guides, will conform to what has be«n prescribed Nop. 1st and f dlowing. I'JO. The company may be broken by plntonns to the left, according to tbo Haine principles, and by inverKo meauH, the instructor giving the cominands prescribed NoH. IK.'} and 185, substituting /'// fur rijhl, and recip- rocally. I'.tl. The movements explained in Nob. 183 and 189 will onlj' bo executed after tho company has Ijcconie well es- tablished in the iiriHciples of the march in column. Ar- ticled Sticoud and Third. lliiiKirhn. I'.i2. Tho instructor, placed in front of the company, will observe whether the mnvement bo executed accord- ing to the principles prchcrilied above; whether the pla- toons, after breaking Into column, are perpeijdicular to tho line of Imttle just occupied ; and whether tlie guide, who placed hiinncif where tho raiirching flank of hlspla- toing thns placed, the guide of the loading platoon will take two pointa on y he ground iu the straight line pasbing between his own and the heels of the ioBtrucicT. 197. Those disponitions Vicing n adc, the instructor will step aside, and command : 1. (MumHi/oncard. 2. Giiidf Ir/l {or righl.) 3. Mabcii. 108. At the ccmmand march, promptly repeated by the chiefs of platoon, they, as well as the guides, will lead off. by a decided step, their renpectlvc pUtiKius, In order that the whole may more smartly, and at the same moment. 109. Tho men will each feel lichtly the elbow of his neighbor towards the guide, and conform himself, in marching, to tho prtnciph'S prescribed in the scbuti of tho soldier, No. 327. Tlio man next to the guide, in each pla- t(K)n, will take care never to pass him, and also to march always uhuut six inches to the right (or left) from him, iu order not to [lOnli him out of the dirictiou. 2uO. The leading guide will observe, with the greatest precislou, the length anil c*dcuco of the step, and inaiu- taiu tho direction of bis march by tho means | rescribcd No. S9. 201. Tho following guide will march exactly In the trace of the leading one, presi-rviug betwiiMi the latter and hiiusulf a distance pie^-isely eijual to the fi-ont of h s platoon, and marchiDj,' in the same step with the Ivadine; guide. 202. Tf tho following guide lose his distsnce from tho on« loading, (uhich can ouly h tppeu by liis owu fiolt.) be will correct himself by slightly lengtliening or short- ening a few steps, in order that there may not b? sii'ideii quickcnings or blackcuings iu the uiRrcli of his platoon. 203. If the eamo guide, having neglectr another, but eiuli repesting the comm:»nd tho moment he catches it fririn tlio instructor. They will repeal no other command given by him ; but will explain, if necessary, to their subdivisions, In an under tone of voice, what they will SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON V. 27 have to execute, as iudicatrd by tlio commands of can- tiun. AuTieiK Third. To change direciion. 211. Tlin cbangosof direction of a column wliilc march" iup, will liu cxeeutod according to llio principles pro- Hcribod for wbooliug oo tbo marcli. Wlunuvcr, there- fore, a column is to cbaugo diroctiou, tbo instructor will change tbo guide, if not already there, to the flank cp- posito the sidn to which tbo change is to bo made : 212. The column being in march right in front if U bo I ho witili of tbo instructor to change direction to tbo right, be will give iho order to tbo chief of the firRt pla tiiou, and immediately go himHclf, or send a marker to tbo point at which tbo cbaugo of direction is to be made ; the instructor, or marker, will place himself on tbo di- rection of tbo guides, ey as to present the breast to that dunk of tbo column. 213. The leading Ruide will direct his march on that pers >u, so that, in passing, bis left arm may just gra/.o bis breast. When the leading guide shall have ap- proached near to tbo marker, tbo chief of bis platoon will command : 1. IUqU Wheel. 2. Mincn. ■JI'J. Tb<^ (irst couimanil will bo f;iven when the platoon r.s at the diHtauce of four p.aees from the marker. 215. At tbo command mtm-k, which will bo pronounced at the iustaut the guide shall have arrived opposite tbo marker, tbo platoon will wheel to the right, eouforming t.i what is prescribed in the school of tbo soldier, No. 21C>. Tbo wheel being finished, the chi(f of each pla- toon will command : 3. Fortmrd. 4. MAncn. 217. Those commands will bo pronouncod and executed IIS is prescribed in the school of tho soldier, N©s. 3;>S and ;(!)9. The guide of tho first platoon will take points on the ground in tho now dircctioa, in order tho better to regulate tho march. 218. The second platoon will continue to 'march straihgt forward till up with the marker, when it will wheel to tbo right, and retake the direct march by the same com- mands and tbo same means which governed tho first plat4X>n. 219. The column being in march right in front, if the instructor should wish to change direction to the left, he will command, gtiido riijlU. At this command, the two guides will move rapidly to tho right of their respective platoons, each passing in front of his bubdivision ; the men will take tho touch of elbows to the right; the in- structor will afterwards conform to what is prescribed No. 213. 220. The change of direction to tho loft will then be executed according to tho same principles as the change of direction to the right, but by inverse means. 221. When the change of direction is completed, the in- Bttuctor will command, gtiidc left. 222. Tho changes of direction in a column, left in front, will bo executed according to the same principles. 22.^. In changes of direction in double quick time, the platoons will wheel according to the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 401. 224. In order to prepare tho men for those formations in lino, which can be executed only by turning to the right or the left, the instructor will sometimes cause the column to change direction to the sids of tho guide. In this case, the chief of the leading platoon will command : Lrft (oTrU/IU) turn, instead of left (nr righl) nlic-I. The Bulidivisiona will each turn, in succession, conforming to what is prescribed in tho school of the soldier. No. 402. The leading guide, as soon as he has turned, will take points on the ground, tho better to regulate tlie direction of the march. 225. It is highly important, in order to preserve dis- tances and tho direction, that all tho snbdiviRions of the column fhotild change direction precisely at the point where tho leading subdivision changed; it is for this reason that that point ought to be marked in ailvance, and that it is pioscribod that the guides direct their march on the marker, also that each chief of sulidivisiim shall not caiise the change to commence till tbo guide of bis subdi- vision has grazed tho broast of this marker. 22G. Kacli chief will take caro that bis Bubdivis'ou ar- rives at tho point of change in a square witli tbo line of direction : with this view, he will face to bis subdivisiou when tho one which precedes ha« commenced to turn or to wheel, and ho will bo watchfol that it continues to march squarely until it arrives at the point where tho charge of directio'n is to commence. 227. If, in changes of direction, tho pivot of the sulxli- vision which wheels should not clear tho wheeling point, the next subdivision would bo arrested and distances lost; for tbo guide who conducts the marching flank hav- ing to describe an arc, in length about a half greater tha!i tbo front of tbo subdivision, tho second subdivision would be already up with tho wheeling point, whilnt tbo flvst which wheels has yet the half of its front to exocutn, and heuco would bo obliged to mark time until that half bo executed. It is therefore prescribed that tbo pivot of each subdivision should take steps of nine or eleven inchoH in length, according to the swiftness of the gait, in order not to arrest the march of tho next subdivision. Tbn chiefs of subdivision will look well to tho stej) of the pivot. an»l cause his step to be lengthened or shortened as may be judgdd necessary. By tbo nature of thin movement, the centre of each subdivision will bend a little to tha rear. 22S. Tho guides will never alter tbo length or the ca- dence of the step, whether the chaTige of direction bo to the eide of tho guide or to the opposite side. 22'.). The marker, placed lit tho wheeling point, will al- ways present his broast to the flank of the column. The in>tructor will take the greatest pains in causing the pre- scribed principles to be observed ; bo will see that each subdivision only commences the clnuige of direction when tho guide, grazing tho breast of tho marker, has nearly passed him, and, that tho marching flank does not de- scribe the arc of too largo a circle, in order that it may not bo thrown beyond the now directiim. 230. In change of direction by wheel, tho guide of the wheeling flank will cast his eyes over tho ground at tho moment of commencing tho wheel, and will describe an arc of a circle whoso radius is equal to tho front of tho subdivision. Aeticlb Foubtu. To hall the cojitmn, 231. The columu being in march, when tho instructor shall wish to halt it, ho will command : 1. Column. 2. Halt. 202. At the second command, promptly repeated by the chiefs of platoon, the column will halt; the guides also will stand fast, although they may have lost bothdistancs and direction. 233. If tho command hall, be not repeated with the greatest vivacity, and executed at the same instant, dis- tances will be lost. 234. If a guido, having lost his distance, seek to recover it after that command, he will only throw his fault on tha following guide, who, if he have marched well, will no longer be at his proper distance; and if the latter regain what he has thus lost, the movement will be propagated to the rear of the column. Article Fifth. Being in column hy platoon, to form to the right or left into Uh« of battle, either at a halt or on the march. 235. The instructor having halted the column, righ^ in front, and wishiug to form it into line of battle, wll place himself at platoon distance in front of the leading guide, face to him, and rectify, if necessary, the position of tho gnide beyond ; which being executed, ke will comBiand : PCnOOL OF THE COMPANY- -LESSON V. 0M. At tbii command, which •will not be repeated br lhec»iic-N of platoon, each of ilivm will p'aco bimwlf , l.rreklv iwo pacf^s outside "t hl» Rtilde, and direct Iho ulijrriment of the platoon pLTpcudiriilarly to the direction (.f tbe colnran, 237. Ka/'h clil»-f boTlntf alifrned ».!• ;;Wtr.(in, wl'l cin;- r:»tnl Fboxt. nii-i rftnrii qnirkly xn "niK jilirf in column. 238. Tlilidi>f)usitiou bolug mado, tl:c iL-'ru. i.r will command : 1. L'_n into tine, tthctl. 1. 3Iau-.i:. 239. At tho command ware*. briRUly rppoufpd fcy tbe cbtefs uf platur>ii, the front rank man on lli<> left of cnch plMt<'On will lacp U' 111? I<>n. nnd pi tc" liiH V^rpast li};hlly Kg:iiiii«t llit> arm of tlie fU-'lc by bin ni'le, who stHnd- lii»t; the platoon* will wbo«-l to llif b-ft. oa tlio T'liiicipl' i^f whpflii fr.im a bilt. and in ronformity to wbat > fcrib the p jiut at which tho ri^lit of the coia- paay wi.l rout in li.ie of battle, and cominaud : Bight— D&TA^. 2J3. At thia command, the two platoons will dress rp- oii the aliguiarut ; thi' front rank min on the riaht of the li'Rdinic plat--on, who llad^ himself c p.ifsite tlio in- tructor eslnblikh d on the dirccliijn of the (.iiidos. wW plico his i br-ist 1 Klitly ngiinst the left nrra of this <.fiii:er. The captain »il direct tliH aligum'Mit from tho right on tho man on the opposite (link of the company. •H^. The cjmpauy being allgue.l, thy captain will cara- mand : FOONT. 245. The instructor eyeing the company in line of l>.\ttle will coaimaud : Guides — Posts. 249. At this cr>minat:d. the covering; Rfrj*»ut will cover till- ciipiHiii, and the U ft guide will return to his plm-uas a file cli>M-r. •.1:47. If thi- column bo Iflt la front, and the instructor should wi-b to foiin it to the right into line of battle, ho will place Li.., stif ut platoon distance in front of ilie IcHdiug (;"''''"• f'"-"" to him, and rtclify, if nocossary, the pi'siliun of the giiiJo Lcyund; which being executed, he will coiumiiud : 1. Bijilit into line Kheel. 2, Mabcu. 243. At the command march, the fro it rank man on the right of each platoon will f i^o ti the tight and jilaco his briMst lightly against the left arm of iho (;uido by his file, who stands fnst ; eiich pluiocn will wheel to the ri^ht, nnd will bo biilt''d by its chiif, when the marching flunk ban aptir.'achcd near th? lino of b:ittle; for this purpose, tho chief of each platoon will command : 1. rialoon. 2. Halt. 240. The cjnimand hnll, will be given when the march- ing fl ink f.f the plnt'/Dii is thrue pares frcuu tho !iue of buttle. The chief of llie B'Cuiid platoon liuvini; halii'd his platoon, will nsumu his placo in tho rank of file CloSITH. 260. Tha captain having hal'ed tho flrRt platoon, will move brittkly to the point at which the left of the compa- ny will rest, and command : Lt. Atthip ri-nimund, the two platoons will dresa op on :' i' ~- - - -.-. on Iho left of the second pi:'' tor, will pi ce his brcnot lij;' ■!! of tUi.4 oflicer. and tho cii] ■ • '. :u the lelt on the muu on I : y. I, tho captain will riloKT. ~.'.u. The indnictor will afterwards cciumand ; Guide*— Tcmra. •zr-i. At tbiB commind, the captain will move to the lit of hU c<>mp»ny, tho covering sergeant will cover . and thu lelt gu what is presf ribed in ^o. 2;!a and f •!! wing: 259. If tho colimin be in mnrch left in frout, thit forma- tii'U will be tniul'i according to the same iTiiiciplcs, and by invoree nienna. 200. If the column l>e marching rifht In front, nnd tho insiru tor should wish t» form it Into Hno r- 1th.->»i» h'!irih, tho capttiln and covering utrg-uut, if not alroiidy tluuu, will m.ivo bii.-k!y to tho side on which tho guide Is designated The non■col;lmis^ioned ollior charged wlih the direction will 111 ive rapidly in fr lit of thi giiid", and will bo ussund in his line of mureh by the insiriicl'T, as is preset ibed No. 104. That nou- ODiniiiljfionid • fflrer will immediately t»Uo prints on the giouod fts indicated in the siiine nun.bvr ') hi imm will tiiko Ihotonchof elbow* toibesiihM.f ilioguidi',ci)nfoim- ing 1h-mselves totlie ptinciidi's of the niurch in liuo. , 204. Tho 83LUIO pi'iuciplcs uro applicable to a column left In front. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON YI. 2» I* LESSON SIXTn. AmiciB FiEST. To brtak Iht company into platnoits, and iu re-j'jmi Oi¥ com- I'dny. To lire/ik tiie company into platoons. 265. Th? company marchina; in Iho cadenced step, and fluppofed to inukc part of a colnmn, right in froof, when the iuatructor shall wish to cause it to break l>y plntoon, hi will givj t!io order to tha caotain, who will command : 1. B^eak iiUo pUitonm, and imnioJiately place himself bo''ore the ccutie of the first pi toon. •2i)G. At the cammntiA breal- into pMoons, the first licii- touaut will pt93 quickly urouad the !• ft to the centre of his platoon, and Rive the ciuiion : Mark time. 207. The "aptaia will then command: 2. March. 208. The first til.i''ijn will continue to march straight forward; the covering Bprgeant will move rapidly to the left flrink of this pltitoon (paaning hy the front rank) as Boon aa the Jlink shall be riicpngsgcd. 203. At I he ciiiimtnd m«rf7(, given by the ciptain, the sr^c )ud platonn will b^ein to mark lime ; its chief will im- m diafely add; 1. JlitjM ohlijne; 2. Maech. Tho last command will bo given so that this platoon may cnm- meuce obliqning the instant the rear rank rf the first platoon shall huve p:iR3ed. The men will ehorten the nt

h to ciiuae it to form company, ho will give the order to the captain, who will command : Form compavi/. 274. Ilivin^ given this command, flio captain will im- ni*^- iattlvadd: 1. First pUiloon; 2. Sight obl'que. 27.'i. The chief of the srcoud platoon will caution it to coufinno to march straight forward. 276. Xha captain wil' taon comni':nl: 3. Marct. 'J.~7. At this command, rept verirg sirg ant, on the k-fc rf the first platoon, will return to the right of the companv. passing byih' front ranlc. 278. Wlon the first platoon shall have nearly unmasked tho second, the ciptain w.ll cominatid : 1. Mark time, ami at tho iii'tanc «he nnniaslting shall be comploie, lie will adi; 2. ^.^Bcn. Tho first platoon will then cca^e to oblique, and m.irk lime. 27'J III ihc' ni^an titno the ecco&d platoon wilt have routinueJ to march straight forward, ai d when it .thnll be nearly no with th« first, tho captain will commau'l Farwidy and at the instant the two platoons thall nnite, add Mar.u; tho fii-at platoon will then cease to mirk time, 250. In a column, left in front, the saioe movement will b.i executed by iuvcrne means, tho chief of the second platoon giving the command Fonrard, and the Miptiiin adiling ihecomuiand Mabcu, wheu th. jlutoons are nnitod. 251. Tho gnidd of tho second platoon, on its right, will pass to its left flank tha moment the pbitoon begin* to ob- liijU": tho gul'Io of the first, on its right, r«niair:ng on that fl^'ikof the plat'jon. 282. Tho instroctor w;U also sometimes canse the com- pany to break and re-form, by platoon, by his own direct commands. In this case, he will give the general com- mands prf scribed for the c«ptain above : 1. Creak into platoons: 2. Mabch ; and, Form company; 2. BIa'CH. 2S.3. If. in breaking tho compiiuy into platoons, the f>nll t J guard against an elongation of the column. rSS. Fnnlts cf but Htila moment, iu a column of a few roropani^s, would be si rir.iis inconveniences iu a gonor.al column of mxnj' battalion^. Hence the inftructor will give the gieato«t care in ctneing all the prascribftd prin- ciples to bo Rtri.tly eiiServ^d. To tbi? end, he will \o\A himself on the directing flank, the better to observe all the movcmeiitB. Abticle Skcond. Beiiiij in colmcn, to break fJes to the rear, and to cause lltan to re-enter into J-ine. 280. The company being in march, and suppoeed to con- stitute a subdivision of a column, light (or left) in front, when the instructor shnll wisn to cause files to break off he will give the order to the captain, who will immedi- ately turn to his company, and command : 1. Tiro fiUi from left (or riijht) to rear. 2. 3IABCU. 290. At tho command march, the two files on the left (or right) of the company will mark time, the others will continue to mnrch ptiaitht forward; the two rear rank m' n (i these files will, at soon as the r^ nr rank of the company shall clear them, move to tho riglit by advancing the outer shoulder; tho odi numb>rwjll plnc» himself behind the third file from that fin'dc, the even number behind the fourth, passing for this purpose behind the odd number; the two front rank men will, in like man- ner, movo to the right when the rear rank of the company shall clear ihem, tie odd nnnibor wi 1 jilaco h mself be- hind tho first file, iha even number beliiud the secon^ file, passing for this purpose behind the odd numler. If the fib 8 aio broken from the right, the men will move to the left, advancing tha outer shoulder, the (ven ' umber of tho rear rank wi'l piare.bim?elf behind the third fie, the odd number of tho SMue rank behind tli» fourth; the even number of the front rai.k behind the first file, the

8 from the samo ftide. he will give Iho trdar to the ca;)'ain, wlio will proofed as above direct'd. •1p2. /.t the command jHiro?!, given by the captain, the fiKs already broker , adv.. ncirg a little tl e outer shoulder, will gain th» fpace < f two fil-s to the right, if Ih" files aio broken from the \tU, and to iho b ft, if the tl'.os are broken from the rinht, fhortenit g, at the same tim^, 'he step, in order to m«ko room between themteUes and the rear rank of the c •mpany for the files last ordered to the rear ; the latier will brtak by the sume commands and 30 5CU00L OF TUE COMPANY— LESSON VI. in lh« same maDnor m tho flr^l. The m«n who JoubU • hould incroaira tho Icii^cth f a <.()iilT>any by liroHkinR c.lT RurcoMiivv (;rou)>4 of two filt'ii, but tho new fil'» mustalwaya ho brukcu from the Biimo Ni(l<>. 204. Tho Instrnctor, wkihfng to canso files hrokoD off til rvtarn into line, will (jive tho order to tlio cajdalu, who will Immodiately command : 1. TirofUt iiit,. Unr. 2. MAncii. 296. At tho H un as tho rear rank of tho company shall clear it. will oblique ut on^-e, and each 1,'roup will place itself behiml tho four neighboring files, and in the same manner, as if tho movement had been executed group by group, faking cure that tho diBtances are preserved. ■2'JS. Tho instructor will nest order the captain to cause two or throe groups to be brought into lino at ouce, Who turning to tho company, will comniund ; Four or six files into line — Mahch. 2'0. At the command vmrch, the files (designated will af the men in the tront nink. The men, wiihuut lurther command, will immediately carry their arms at will, as indicated in ihesrhoolif the soldier, Mo. 2 1 a. They will no K.ng'T be riHjuiretl to march in tho oolenced ptvce, or with tlio panv? foot, or to remain sili nt. The files will niarrti nt o>iN>; but care will be taken to pr<'vent the rank* from intermixing, the front rank from getting in advance f I the gtiide, a'ld the rear rank from "(MUiug to too g'uat u distance. '.'.OO. The company marcbing in the route step, the in- structor will cause it to chaugo direction, which will bn ex<'Cuted without formal conuuanko steiis of fourtocm inches, iu onler to clejir the wheeling {loint. 310. The company marching in tho route step, to caiiKO it to pass to the cadonced step, tho instructor will first order pieces to bo brought to the right shoulder, and then command : 1. Qiiitk lime. 2. MAncit. Till. At the command m ex'M:ufo(l by the same commands, and the some means, as if the com- pany wore marching in tho cadencod step. When tho compony breaks into platoons, thechlef of each will movo to the flank of his platoon, and will take tho plaroofthe guide, who will stop back into tho ri'ur rnnk. 317. The company being in column, by platoon, and pupposed to march in the route step, the instructor can cause the front to bodiminishedand increased, by section, if the platoons have a front of twelve files or more. 318. Tho movements of diminishing and increasing front, by scQtion, will bo executed according to the prin- ciples indicated for the same movements by platoon, Tho SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 31 right sections of platoons will be commanded by the cap- tain and first lieutenant, respectively ; the Ictt sections, by thi: two next subalterns in rank, or, iu their absence, by sergeants. 319. The instructor wishing to diminish by ecction, will give the order to the captain, who will command : 1. Break inlo sections. 2. MiBcn. 320. As soon as tho platoons shall bo broken, each chief of section will place himself on its directing flank in tho front rank, the guides who will be thns displaced will fall back into the rear ramk ; tho file closers will close up within one paco of this rank. .^21. Platoons will be broken into sections only in the column in route, the movement will never be executed in the manceuvrcs, whatever may be tho front of l^e com- pany. y'22. When the i nstructor shall wish to re-form platoons, he will give the order to tho captain, who will commai>d : 1. Form jUatoous. 2. SIar-CH. 32:5. At the first command, each chief of section will pliice himself before its centre, and the guides will pass into the front rank. At the command viarch, the move- ment will be execute! as bus been prescribed for forming company. The moment tho platoons are formed, the chiefs of tho left sections will return to their places as file closers. ;i.;4. Tho instructor will also cause to bo executed the diminishing and increasing front by files, as prescribud iu tho preceding article, and iu the same manner, as if marching in the cadenced ttep. When the company is broken into sections, the subdivisions must not be re- diicetl to a f out of less than six files, not counting the chief of th) section. 325. The company being broken by platoon, or by section, the instructor will cause it, marching in the route step, to march by the flank in tho same di- rection, by tho commands ami the means indicated, Nos. 314 and 315. Tho moment the subdi^Hions. shall face to ihe right (or left), the first file of each will wheel to the left (or right), in marching, to prolong the direction, and to unite with tlic rear file of tli» suhilivision immedi- ately preceding. The file closers wiil take their habitual places in tti3 march by tho flank, before the union of sub- ilivisions. KlCy. If the company be marching by tho right flank, and tho instructor ehould wish to imdouble the flies, which might sometimes be found uecettary, he will inform tho captain, who, afior causing the cadeuced step to be rnsiiraed, and aims to be shouldered or supported, will Command : 1. In two ranks, undoiMc files. 2. Mar'"B. 327. At the second command, the odd numbers will con- tinup to march straight forward, the even number^ will shorten the step, and obliquing to the left will place themselve.s pruinptiv behind tho odd numbers; the rear riink will gain a step 'o tho left so as to rc-take the toncli of elbows on the side of the front rank. 82S. If tho company bo marching by the left llauk, it will lie tho even niunbets who will continue lo march for- ward, and tho odd numbers who will undouble. 32'J. If the instructor should wisli to double the files, li« will give the order to the captain, who will com- niund : 1. In four rault, douhle files. 2. March. ,130. At the command march, the files will double in the manner as explained, whuu tho company f.Koa by the right or tho left flank. The iuatructur \Kill afterwards nnuHe the route step to be resumed. 331. Tho various movements proscribed in this lesson may be exi-cuted in double quick time. The men will be liroiiylit, by degress, to pass over at tliis gait about eleven hundred yards in eoven niinute.<<. 332. Wlieu tho company marching in the ronto stop shall halt, tho rear rank will close up at thi' command h-tU, and tlie whole will iihoulJer arms. 333. Marching in the route stop, the men will be per- mitted to carry their pieces in the manner th«y shall find most convoHieut, paying attention only to holdinf; the muzzles up, so as to avoid accidents. Article Focbtii. CowUermarch. 331. Tho company being at a halt, and supposed to con- stitute part of a column, right in front, when the in- structor shall wish to cause it to countermarch, he will command : 1. CountcrnuircU. 2. Company, right— Fi.cs. 3. Sy file left. i. March. 33.5. At the second command, tho company will tico to the right, the two guides to tho right about; the captain will go to the right of his company and cause two files to break to tho rear, and then place himself by the sido of the front rank man, to conduct him. 33G. At the eomraand vi'vch both guides will stand fast; the company will step off emnrtly ; the first file, conducted by the Cflptain, will wheel around the right guide, and t^irect its march along the front rank so as to arrive behind, and two p.ices frsm the left guide ; each file will come in succession to wheel on the same ground around the right guide ; the leading file having arrived at a point opposite to the left guide, tho captain will com- mand: 1. Comptuiy. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4, Iihj?U— Dress. 337. Tho first»command will be given at four paces from the point where the leading filo is to rest. 33S. At tho so ond command, tho company will hUt 339. At the third, it will face to the front. 310. At the fourih, the company will dress by tho ri,:ht; tLc captain will stop two paces outside of the left, guide, now on the rigLt, and direct the aliKnmont, so that rhe frMiit ranli may be embused betweon the two guides ; theccmpauy being aligni'd, he will command Front, and place Urn self befoio the con ti r of the company as if in column ; the guides, passing along the front rank, will shift tj tho'r proper places, on the right and left cf that rank. 311. la a c^'Iumn, by platoon, Iho countermarch will bo executed by the 8,.mo commands, anil according to fhosbme principles: the guide of each platoou will face about, a-id its cliirff will plHCo himself by the side of tho file nn the right, to conduct it. * 312. In a column, left in front, th'* countermarch will be extcuted by inverse commands and moan!>, but accor- ding to tho same principles. Thus, the movement will be made by the right flank of subdivisions, if tho right boiu front, and by the lift flank, if th? left bo in front ; in both cases tho eubdivinions will wheel by filo to tho fide of tho frjLt rauk. Article Fifiu. Ueing in column by platoon, to form on the rigid (or left) into line of baltlc. 313. Tho column by platoon, right in front, being in march, the inctructor, wishing to form it on tho light into lino of battle, will command : 1 . 0)1 the right into line. 2. Guide right. 34t. At the second con mnnd, tlif guide of e.ich pi itoon will shift quickly to its right fl mk, and tho men will touch elbows to the right ; the column will continue to tnarrli stiaight forward. '■A't. Tho icstfuctor li.-iving given the second commaud, will move briskly to the point at wliiili the right of Ihrf oompuny ought to nst iu li'e, an I pla o himself facir.g the point (if direction to Ih.i loft whirli bo will choose. 3lr>. Thu lino of b.itllo oii;:lil (« be so chosen thit tho guide of each platoon, alter h.iviug turiitd to the riKht, may Irivo, at least, leu p ices to lake before arriving upon that lino. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY- -LESSON Vl. 347. Tha haai of the column being nf'urly opposite t» | the iDStructo", the c>i f of cbo fl-st i iBtoon w II ccm- i mind: 1. Jii^Mtum; Midwhtn exactly opposlio to Uuit ' poini,be will add : ! JH'i. At the conirainl. marcS, tho first platoon wll turn '" '' ■• ! • ■■ 'i*" rmlty wjih tha i>riuciiIo» pro- ' il' .h> B Idiar, No. i'^l. Its piii'lo u.M 1 tJ br'na th« fr^nt rank niiin, lui; .. , ., . ,)■ " I ■ t . llio iiuirucior; tho chl 'f of tb« pint (ID will ninrch Ix-fore its c?nt>T ; Hud wi'Cd iti KUide bb^l bo nea,- ihp liuo of battle, bo will com mind : i . J'liiiuun. 2. Halt. PAO. vii ill' iiim.ind hnlt, whifli will be pven nt t'lics from Ilia iluo of buttle, the plrttoon will b»!t; lb- Jil-d, not yet iu lino, will c inn- up jTi'inptly. The jiU'de will throw bimBHf on the linn of baltla. oppo- site lo on« ) dldtaiice of ibioe paci'8 from iho huu ol buttle, tins platoon will be halted, as preicribtd f.^r the fir>-t ; at tb" i«stKnt It hats, its guidi- will Hjiiii j; on the line ol bi tie, oppnfite to one of tho three Uft li.es of b H jilatoon, and will be assured iu bis position liy llw itstnjctor.- BoS 'Ibe chief of the s-co'id platoon, aecinc; all its filoR inline, audits guide ostablished on tbo direction, will comidaud : Jli'jhl—'Dacss. 354. Iliving given this command, bp -R-ill return to his place as a file < loser, piissin^ uround the I^ft ; the eecond platoon will drms iiu tn tli>i alignment of iho first, and, when ostublibbed, tbu captuia will comm^Dd : FUOM. SS**. The movement cndud, tbo ir,s;r;:c!:ir will ccni- inaud : Ciddei—Voft'S. r.5G. At lb s command, the two );ni k,- vi i uuiiii to their placoii in liuc of buttle. 307. A column, by platoon, left in front, wiil form on the left into line of luttio, uccordiiv; t.) Iho siiiiie piiml. pies, UMil, by iuvereo inciiiiH. apiilyiii^ to iln i-.oiid pla- toon whit IS pie-ictlhed (or the firitt, iiud ri cipicc'-lly. The chiefof tbo second platoon b:ivini; aligned il.lii.iii the point of appiii, (ih -> left.) will rotire to hi« plxco as a file closer. The r^iptain having liultcd thti firi>t llatuou Ibree paces behiuU ilio line of battle, will go to tbo same p„iut to align this platoc>n, and tbi.-n the c mpanies of a rcgiraent are to booxT- eised. nt the »ame time, in tho scho.l of the company, the (olonel will Inolcnte the lesson tr lessons they are sevo- rally to execute. The whole will c nunenco by a bugle kigual, and teriniuato in a liko manner. FbrnuUiom qf a tompinp from ttoo ranki into thtijU rank, and rc( ijtrucalt}/, 369. The company beinp formed Into two ranks In tho m inner Indicated No. >i,^cho^l of ihe roldier, aud iitii>- IHjsed ti' p i^lf ui tie oaii.e time with ihegiiiJe; the front rai:k luiu will turn to the rl. ht hi the timt btep, follew tie ^Uide, aud be bimi-eli followed by tb .• rear ruuk tu>in of Ins Ilie, who wiilmme to turn on tho Bum'- f <■( wh-T" )'■■ had lurned. The sec iiut file, rtbd Ku;c ier files, will step off as baa teen inst, ihe fr.nt rank ni'in of each file : y the rear rank iii'in of tbo file next on M r.^m. Hi- euptuin will siipii intend the tnovemeiit, and wuen tho lasi m m flnill have ^tepjcd ofT, be V ill halt the eomi'any, and lace it ttj the fniit. 3t3. The fi'.o clo!)(-rs will tak.^ tueirpiucesiu liiio of bat- I tie, tivo paces iu tear of the lank. j 3GI. The couipany being in single rank, when the In- I Btructor shall with to formitinio.tworauks, bo willcuui-^ inabd : 1. la luso rai^hs, form company. 2, Company rght—Vh^t. 3. OlAiicn. 3C5. At the second command, the company will fico to the ri^bt ; the ri):hi gnido and the man ou ihe right will ri'iu liu fdced to llu- ftunt. Stli. At the cu'uinand marc/i. lb<» ni«n who have fared to the right, wilLMep >lf, nna furin bUx in tliu lollowiug inauULr: ibi> eecud luun iu Ibo iiuik will pla.-e biniRulf liebind the first lo foriu the first file, ihe third will place biniKelf by tbeBide ol the first in tie troit rank; tbo fonrtli behind the third in tb« rear riik. All tho obers will, iu like mauuory plaeo tUeni -elves, alternately, tu the fiout and icir tank, and iliiis lurm hies of two nieu, on t'je lelt of those alrondy oiiued. 3C>7. The format ons abive JeHciiboil will bo hnVitually executed by tbo right cf the conipanies : but when tho iustrjictor shall wish to ha e tbcin execiiled bv the lefc, bo will lace the ccinpauy about, itud post tbo guidos iu tho roar tank. ."iiS. 'the formation will then bo exocnted by tho i>nme commands, and aocoiding l« th^ same prinriplefiiis by tbo front rank ; tbu niovi uieut roiumeuciiig with the lolt file, now becomo tho ri(:ht, ai.d in estb fue by the rear tank man. now bicnme tho front : the leit guiJo will coufonn to what has b'Oii j*iefCril'od fi r the right. 30'J. The foriuation ended, tbo iusiructor will fiic« the company to iis proper Iront. IJ.'O. When a battalion iu line li-'B to execute eitl'or of the tonimtion« above iies>ribod. the Colonel w.ll ciiue it to break to the roar by tbo right or left of companies, and will then giv« tbu rouimauds just prescribed lor the in- strnctor. JCach company wiU execute tho movtuient as if acting slncly. Formntioii of a cnmjvinn fmin tiro rnnl-n into four, nnil y i- procaily, ul a halt, aiui in ntareli. 371. Tho company beirg formed In two ranks, at ahalt, at'd supposed to form part of a column richt i'l ircnt, when the luBtructor shall with to form it into four raukv, be will commana : 1, III four ra»l-», form compdny, 2, fjinpnuy I^—I^oz, 3. Makcu (sr (2uiiMc>/iiii7v'— MaucuJ. 072. At tbo second command, the left giiido will remain faced to the front, tho company will face to the Itft : the rear rank will gain the distance ol one pace fro-n tho front ruuk by u wido step to the left and rear, and the men INSTEUCTIOir FOR SKIKMISHEKS. 33 will form iutj fuur rsiuks aa prescribed iu the school of the soldier. 373. At the comniAiid inarch, the first fil»i of fonr men will rpfaco to the front without undoubling. All the other files of four will step off. and clcsins; auixessively to abotit five inches of the preceding file, will lialt, and im- mediately face to the front, the men roniaining doubled. 374. The file closers will take thoir cow places in line of battle, at two paces in rear of the fourth rank. 875. 1'he captain will superintend the movement. 376. The company being in four ranks, when the in- structor shall wish to form it into two ranks, he w'ill command : 1. In two ranks, form C'liiipiHy. 2. Compamj rujltt — FaCS 3. Habcu (or double quick— M\B.tn). 377. At the second command the left guide will stand fast, the company will f.-tcc to the right. .378. At th'? comraind nhr.-ch, the right guide will stop off and march in the prolongation of the front rank. The leading file of four men will step off at the same time, the oilier files ptanciing faiit; the seeond file will step off when there shall be between it «ind the first space suffi- cient (0 S»rm into two ranks. The f 'llowins; files will ex?cute successively what has been prercribed for the Focond. As soon as the last fi'o shall have its d:stance, the instructor will command : 1. Compavy. 2. Halt. 3. Fkont. 379. At the command front, the company will face to the front, and the files will undouble. 380. The cmpany beins: fjrmed in two tanks, and marching t<*the front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into four rank", he will command : 1. la four ranis, form compaii;/. 2. Bij the Iffl double Jile$. 3. Mabcq (or doubh B : forward, and liy the flank. Itt. The deployment forward will be adopted when the (umpany is behind the line on which it is to be eftab- lisbe.l as skirmishers : it will h'^ deployed by the flank, when it finds itself alre.idy on that line. 17. Whenever a company is to be lif-ployeri as skirmifih- tT6, it will be divided into two platoons, and each platoon will >ie B ibdirided into two sections; the comrades in l/ntlle, finning groups of four men, will be careful to know and susfain each other. The captain will assure bijiself that the files in i ho center ol each platoon and •ierti.e«, in no ca.se wib they lose Kijjht of each other. 21. The front to be occrpied to cover a battalion cow- prebends its front and the half of each inter'al which suparafes it from the battalion on its right and left. If a lln( , whose wings are not nnpiiorted, should becoverod by xkirmisbers. it will be nece■^ary ciilior to protect the flanks with skirmishers, or to extend them in front of the line so f«ir beyoml the winiis as tffectnally to oppos' nny attempt which might be made by th.i enemy's sklriiiishers to disturb the flanks. To dt-phiy /onrnrd, 2. A company being at a halt or in march, when the captHin shall wish to deploy it forward on the left file of the first platoon, holding the stcond platoon in reserve, b < will command : 1. First pluloon — nj) sl.inninheis. U. On the left fih— take inleriat^. o. MARcn {or iloithle qnirh — Maucu.) i'i At the flrst command, tlie second and third lieiiteu- ants will place themselves rapidly two pact'ij b(hiiid the centrt'S of the right and loft eectinns of the lirtt platoon: tht fitth aergeant will move one pace in front of the centio , of the first platoon, and wilt place himself l>etwe«n tha . two sections in the Iront rank as soon as the movement I liegins ; the fourth sergeant will place himself on the Ivft : of the front rank of the snmo plaioon. as soon rb he can I pass. The captain will indicate to this str^reaut the p'iiit I on which h^uishcs him to din-ct Uia march. The first lieutenant, placing himself beluns the ceulre of the tMond platoon, will command : Second jihluon /nicJlirun/ — SIabcii. 24. At this command, the second platoon will sleptbres paces to the rear, so as to nnmask the flank of the first platoon. It will then be baited by its chief, and the sicond bergoaut will pUce liiuiself on the left, uiid the third ser(je«nt on the iij;ht llai.k i f this platoon. ■J5. At the conimund march, the lell group ol four men, conducted by the fourth turscaiit, will Oirict itbolf < u the point incicatod ; all the other grou]'S of fours throwing forward briskly the Iff. Khouluei, will move diagonally to the tronc in double quick tlme,80 as to gain to the right the space of twenty paces, which shall be the dittAnce between each group and that immediately on' its bit. When tho second group from the left kIihU arrive eu a line with, and twenty pices Itfiu the fiist, it wiliiuarch i-lraight to the trout, conforming to the gait and direc- tion of the first, ktoping constantly on ti,e tame align- ment and at twenty pnci s from it. The third group, mid all the others, will conform to what has just b eu pro- Bcrib d fur the second ; they will arrive succebsively on the line. The right guide will uriive with the labt g oup. 2i). The left guide I aving rea' bed the point where the b ft of the line hhould rest, i he captain will commnLd the skirmishers to halt ; the lueu composing each grouji of fours will then immediately deploy at five phces from each other, find to the right and leit <.f the IVout rank man of the even Jiio in e.ich group, the re r rank men pluciug tbeiiiselvi B on he lelt of their lile leaders. If any groups be not in line at the command halt, they will move up rapidly, confirming to what has jutt been fro- scribed. 27. If, during the deployment, the line i-h"uld be flrei! upon by the enemy, the captain may cnuie tbo ^oups .> lours to deploy, us they gain their proper distances. 28. The line being loinifd, the non-commisbioued c ni- ters on the r!gbt. left and cmtre of the platoon will place themselx s ten j.area in rear ol the line, and oppo site the pusitiona they resj actively occupied. The chief-> of B' ction" will promplly iictify any irregularities, ainl then placetbeiiiselves twenty-live orlhirty ; aces iBrfaroi the centre of til- ir seoliouR, each having with him (oui men taken fioiu the re.serve, and also a bugler, who will n peat, if nccespury, ti e signals Fonnde !. This moveiiionf, which is employed to extend a linn of skirmishers, will be executed according to theprinri- ple^ prescribed for deployments. .V-'. If it be supposed that the lite of skirmishers is »t a halt, and that the cHptain wishes to cxt«nd it to the left, ho will command : 1. Jj'j the Ml. finiik (na iikuiij pares) exletul iiUvriuh. 2' Mabch (or -hmlde quick — MahCIi). .";j. At tho command \,i,unty paces from the second, and so on to tho right. As the groups halt, they will face to the enemy, and deploy as has been explained for the left gronp. indicated No. 30. 43. The deployment may be made by the loft flank according to the same priuclpl'is, substituting A'/f/a»/i: for right Jlank. 41. If the captain thould wish to deploy tho company upon tho centre of i.no of tUo platoons, he will com- mand : to tho rear as they are relieved by the extension of the intervals. To close intervals. O'J. This movement, like that of op<>uing iutervals, will be exf cuted according to the principles prescribed for the deployments. j CO. "if the line of skirmishers be halted, and theoxp- I. Second platoon— as skinumheis. 2. By Ihe right and left i tain should wish to cljse intervals to the left, he will Jlanks—take inlcrvals, 3. M4ECB(ordoi(l?ei/HicA:) Mahch, 'command: '.',>> INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISUERS. 1. Py tUt Iff I ilanic {so manti )>arri) cZm) iHUrraU. 2. M411C11 (or douhle 5111'f'.— March). t>l. A« . .roupwill BtAnd fint, lie- iiid (■'•ji2. Till' left cronp. cnmliictpd by tho froidp. will roDtl- 11116 lo mov<" on in tlip 'iirpction pievlously iodif lUcd ; the nllipr croups, ndTnnciDK th» right Bhoiilr"er. will close to the tffr, tintJI thp intorvals nre reduced to the prescr.hed dihtnni'K. r4. Int" rvii1»i jn dump prlnciplrg. 1.5. When iiit"TViiIi< are to t>p rlo^od up, in order to re- inforcp ft lin*" of skirmiohiTB. so as to caiwo two cnmpn • tiiPH to coTor 11m pronnd which hnd hi-n pnviously nrciipiod hy onp. tho nfw rnnipany will di-ploy so as to finlnh its movpment nt twenty parps in rrar of the lino it id to occupy, MTid thu mpD Will suropwivply move upon that linp. Ml tItPv Rhall In- nnnia*kpd hy the m n of the old comiiaiiv. The n hprvcs of lli» two companiL'^j will unite behind the centre of the line. To rcllric n co./ij((Tiij drptoycil us slinnMcrs. 66. Whon a cr.mpany of skirmishers is to be relieved, tho captain will be advised of the iuteution. which ho will immrdiatoly eomuunicate to his firstand seconJ lieuten- ants. f.7. The new company will execute i's deployment for- ward, ai> as to firiioh the movement at about twenty paces In rear ol the line. GK Arrived at this distance, the m^n of the new com- pany, by command of th' ir captain, will advance rapidly ii few pacen beyond the old lin" and halt ; tho new line lii-iiiK established, the old company will a.sHemble on its rc'st.fve, talcin;; care not to jret into frroups of fours until tliev are be\ond the fire of the eiieniy. (■'9. If the Hkirmishe;s to be relieved are marchin? in re- tro t, the company thrown out to relieve them will deploy by tbi' ll!4uk. as preHCribed No. 3S and followine. The old Hklrmishers will continue to retire with order, and haviuK passed the new lin», thoy will form upon the reserve. Ahtiole Secofd. To adcance. To ailvaticc ill line, and lo retreat in line. TO. When a platoon or a company deployed as sUir- niisherH is marching by the front, the truido v, ill be habi- tnally in the centre. No particiibir indication to this ef- fei*t need be kIvou in the commamls, but if on the con- trary it be intended that the directing icnideHhould boon tlip right, or left, the command ijititli: ri'jIU, or guide h/l, will be ifiven immediately after that <>r forward. 71. The captain, wishing the line of skirmiehers to ad- vance, will command : 1. Fuiwurd. 2 March (ot duullc quicf:~Mji.Kai.) 12. This commund will b? repeated with the prcateat r:ipidlty by the chic^fs of sections, and in case of need, l)y tho sergeants. This rule is (jeneral, whether tho skir- mishers march by the front or by the flank. ".'1 At the Ilrst command, three serifiants will move briskly on the line, tho first on the right, tho second ou the u'ft, an 1 the third in the center. 74. At tho command niarc/i, tho line will move to (he front, the euide charged with the direction will move on the jioiiit indicated to him, tlie sUirniishfrs will hold themcolves alifnied ou this Riiido, uud preserve their intervals toward him. 7r.. The chiefs of soctioiia will m^rch immediately behind their eections, so as to direct their movements. 70. Tho captain wi'.l ^ive a general suporintendence to tho muyement. 77. When lio tball wi.-h to halt tho skirmishers ho will command : U.U.T. 78. At this oiumand, briuky repeated, tho line y>v\ halt. The chiefs uf stctious will pr«jmplly rectify any irregularity in the alignment and intervals, and kfler taking every pcssible nclrauta^e which the ground may offer lor protectinx the men, they, witl. tho three wr- geintsiu the line, will ic-tire tu thoir pri>l)er placoi in rear. Til. Tho captain, wishing to march tho ikirmlsbers in retreat, Will cunio aud : 1. In relreal. 2. M.iBcu (or dtulU gutcir— UaiiCU.) 80. Atthe flrstcoaniiand, the three sergeants will moT9 on tho line as pre-cr.bed No. ~:i. 81. Attbocommind march, tho skinuis'iera will faco about individually, and inarch to tho rear, couformioi; to the principles preHcrllied No. 74-. 82. Tho ollicori and sergeants will use every exertion to preserve order. 8:1. To halt tho skirmi-hers, marcliiog in retreat, the captain v< 'H c,.i..!n' 1.1 ■ H4. At tUi> coniiii'.nJ, the skiriuifhcrs will halt, and immeriiately face to the front. 85. Tho chiefs of sections and tho Ihreo gnidca will eacn conform himself to what is prepcribed IJo. 78. To change direclion, SU. It the «cnimauder of a line of skirmishers shall wisn to cause it to change direction to the richt, lie will command : 1. Rigid ichcel. 2. }Iinca(oi dotihlc quick — M&RCn). 87. At tho command mircJi, the right guide will mark time in his place ; the lelt guide will move in a circle to the rig t, And that he mav properly regnlate his move- ments, will occasionally cast hi: ey.H to tho ri^^ht, so as to observe the Jirec.iou of tho Hue, and the nature of th> ground to be pasi-ed over. The center guide will also march in a circle to tho right, and in order to conform his movements to the geiierrtl direction, will take Sre th'it his Bt -ps are only half the length of the steps of tho guide on the left. 88. The skirmi-'hers will regulate tho length of thtir steps by their distance froia tho ntarching lUuk, being less as they approach tho pivct, and greater ns they are removed from it; they will often look to the marchiuf; flank, sons to preserve the direction and their intervals. 89. When tho cnnniander of the line shall wish to re- sume the direct march, ho will command : 1. Forward. 2. Mabch. 90. At the command march, tho line will conso to wheel, and the skirmishers will move direct to the front; the centre guide will march ou file point which will bo indicated to him. 91. If the captain should wish to halt the line, in place of moving it to tho front, ho will commsud : Halt. 92. At this command.the lino will halt. 93. A change of direction to the loft will bo made according to tho same principles, and by inverse moans. 94. A lino of Bkirmiohors marching in retreat, will change direction by the same means, and by tho same couimandrt, as a lino marching iu iidvaiice ; for example, if tne captain should wish to refufie his left, now become the right, he will command : 1. Left wheel. 2. MARen. At the command halt, tho skirmishers will face to the enemy. INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 9.). But if, iustead of haltinf; the lino, tho raptain, nlionid wiah to continiio to lusrch it in retreat, he will, wlien he judt^ea tho lino has wlioeled suSicicntly, conimaud : 1. In ictreal. 2. Maich. To march ly flank. OG. Tho captain, wishing tho skirmishera to march \>j tU' right fl'iuk, will command : 1. By the right flank. 2. March (or douhle quick — March). 97. At the first corainand, the three sorgoatjts will place thomsolves on the lino. '.»«. At tlio command mr.rch, the skirmishers will face to the right and move off; tho right guide will place hlm»olf by tho side of the leading man on the right to conduct him. and will march on the point indicated ; each Rkirnilsher will fake caro to follow directly in the direction of the one immediately procoding him, and to prosorve his distanca. 'JO. The Bkirmishers may be murched by tho left flank, iiceoriliDR to the seme prinoiplf 8. and by tho same com- mands, substituting left for right; the left guidj will )ico himself br* t)ie side ol the leading man to conduct him. 100. If tho skirmishers bo marching by t' e flank, and tho captain should wish to hilt them, ho will command : Halt. 101. At this command, the skirmishers will halt and face to tho enemy. Tho officers and sergeants will conform to what has been prescribed No. 78. 102. Tho reserve should execute all the movements of the lirip, and be hold always about one hundred atid fifty paces from it, so as to bo i.i position to second its opera- tions. 103. Whi?n the chi f of the roservo pliall wish to march il in advance, ho will command : J. Platoon foncard. 2. Guide left. .3. March. If ho should wish to march it in r»>tipat, ho will command: I. In retreat. 2. March. 3. (7uidc righ'.. At th^omraaud halt, it wi'l re-face to the enemy. 104. T'lo men shonld be mads tr) understand that tho signals or commaud«. such as forward, mean that the pkinnlshcrs shall march on the enemv ; m retreat, t\iAt they shall retire, and to the right or left flank, that the men must face to the right or left, whatever may bo their posi- tion. 10.5. If tho skirmishers bo marching by the flank, and tho captain should wish to change direction to the right (or left), be will command: 1. By file right (or left). 2. M.\RCH.' These movements wll! also be executed by the signals STos. Hand 15. Article Third. The flriiigf. 100. Skirmishers will fire either at n halt or marching. Toflreatahall. 107. To canac this Are to be execHttd, t!io captain will command : . Commence— Firing. 108. At this command, briskly repeated tho men of the front rank will comraenci^firin;;; they will re-load ripidly, and hold themselves in roadini^ss to firo a^ain. During thi.H time the men of thf rear rank will come to a ready, and as sofiii as their respoctivo file leadtra have loaded, they will also Are and re-load. Tho men of each file will thus contlnua the firing, conforming to this principle, that tho one or the other ehall ahvays have bis pioco loaded. 109. Light troops should bo always cnlm, so as to aim with accuracy ; they should, moreover, endeavor to esti- mate correctly the distances between themselves and the enemy to be hit, and thus be enabled to deliver their fire with the greater certainty of success. 110. Skirmishers will not remain in the same place whilst reloading, nnless protected by accidents in tho ground. To flre marching. 111. This firo will be executed by tho same commands as the flre at a halt. 112. At tto command, cc/Diiiioice firing, if the line bo advancing, the front rank man of every tile will halt, fire, and reload before throwing himself forward. Tho rear rank man of the same file will continue to march, and after passing ten or twelve paces beyond his front rank man, will halt, come to a ready, select his object, and fire when his front rank man has load'd ; the fire will thus con- tinue to bo executed by each file; tho skirmishers will keep united, and endeavor, as mnch as possible, to pre- serve tho general direction of the alignment. il3. If the line bo marchiug in retreat, at the com- mand commence firing, tbn front rank man of every file will halt, faco to the enemy, flre, and then re-load whilst mov- ing to thorear; the rear rank man of tho same file will con- tinue to march, and halt ten or twelve paces beyond his front rank man, face about, come to a ready, and firi', when his front rank- man has passed him in retreat ami loaded; after which, ho will movo to the rear and reload: the front rank man in his turn, after marching briskly to the rear, will halt at ten or twelve paces from the rear rank, faco to tho enemy, load his piece and firp, conform- ing to what has just been prescribed; the firing will thus be continued. 114. If the company bo marching by the right flink, at the cmmand, ciimmence firing, the front rank man of every file will face to the enemy, step one pace forward, halt, and firo, the rear rank man will continue to move for ward. As soon as the front rank man has fired, he will place himself briskly behind his rear rank maa and reload whilst marching. Ti'hoB he has loaded, the roar rank m«n will, in turn, step ono pace forward, halt, and flre, and returning to the ranks, will place himself behind his front rank man ; the latter, in his turn, will act in the same manner, observing the same principles. Attho command, ecase firing, the men of the rear rank will retake thiir original positions. If not already there. 116. If tho company be marching by the left flank, th« flre will bo executed according to the same principles, but in this case, it will be the rear rank men who will firo first. llfi. The following rules will be cbserved in the cases to which they apply. 117. If the line bo firing at a halt, or whilst marchinc by the flank, at the command, Fortcard — March, it will be the men wliose pieces are loaded, without regard to the particular rank to which they belong, who will move to tho fiont. Tho.ie men whose pieces have been dis- charged, will remain in their places to load them before moving forward, and the firing will bo continued agree- ably to the principles prekcr'bed No. U'2. lis. If the lino he firing either at a halt, advancing, or whilst marching by the flank, at the command. In retrent March, tho men whose pieces are loaded will remain faced to the enemy, and will fire in this position ; the men whose pieces are "discharged will retreat loading them, and tho tiring will be continued agreeably to the princi- ples prescribed No. 113. 119. If the line of skirmishers be firing either at a halt, advancing, or in retreat, at the command, Dij the right (or Itftflnuk — March, the men whose pieces are loaded will step one pace out of tho goneral alignment, face t» the enemy, and fire in this position; the men whose pieces are unloaded wil! face to the right (or left) and march in the direction ind catfd. The men who stepped out of the ranks will idnce themselves, immediately after firing, upon tho gen • oral direction, and in rear of their front or rear rank men. as the case may bo. The fire will be continued ac- cording to the principles prescribed No. 114. 38 IXSTRUCnON FOR SKIRMISHERS. 1-0. SkirmUherii nill be babitnatod to load tbtirpi>r(>« nhilU marching; but Ibey will be eoJoloc-J to halt al- ways an iaetant, when in the Bt.t ot charj^iug carlr.dge, and prirnirK. 121. 1 h'-y Bhould hs practised to &to nnl load knoeliug, IjiuK down, and Hitting, and much I.l.t-rtv blimlil l>p al- lowed in those exiTcises, iu thitt ibij itj.ij bi iX' cud d in the manner fjund to bo mixit c .uvouifi:!. t■'kiiu^i^he^s should becaut oiit-d nM to fn-;; -t Hi I in wlmluvi-r pjsi- tion th(<)' mnr load, it if important thiit tho j>i<'ceFli'jUld be placed upriubt U-forc ramming, in ordiT tliat ibi.- entire rhart;c of powder may rsBch tlio bottom of iliu bore. 122. Inrommonriof; tbu fire, thcrnvnof thu same rank vhould not nil fire at ouce, and ibe men of tb it.ime flle should I e particular that one or the other of Iheiu bo al- n8}B loaded. 1^3. In retreating, the otTicer commnnditig tho skfr- miHbers should soixe on every advantage wbicb Ibe ground may present, for arresting the eueuiy as lou;; as possi- bl.'. 121. At the signal to inii>e jiriny, the ca}it:iin wll si-e that the or'ipr is promptly obeyed ; but tlu< men uhu inHV not be loaded, will load. If thn lino be uiarcbiug, it will continue the movement; but the man of ouch tile who happens to ba iu front, will wait uuttl the mau lu tbe rear shall be abreast with him, 126. If a line of skirmisherM bo firing advancing, ut the command IiuU, the line will re l'»rni upon tliu Bkir- raikhcrs who nrc in front ; when the liue i'> lotriiiitinj;, upon the skirmikhors wlioare in rmr. 12'i. OffliMrn 5.honld watch with the groutoat pobsible vigiltnce over a line of Hkirmishers; in battle, thiy •hould neither carry a ri lie or fowling piece. In all the firines, they, xswell as the gergcants, should eee thiit order and silence are preecrvcd, aua thiit the skiruiisbor* do not wander ini])rudcntly; they should tspecially cau- tion them to be cnlm and collecttd ; not to lire until tb>*} distinctly perceive tho objects at which they aim, and are sure that those objects are within proper runRe. Skir- ralxbers should take advantage prtniptly, and withiutolli- gence, of all shelter, and of all accideuM of tho ground, to conceal themselves from tho view of tho ent my, and to f^otect themselves from liia fire. It may olteu h'lppen, that intervals are momentarily lost when stvenil men ne-r each other find a common skelter ; but when tbcy fjuit this position, they should iniuiodiately ro.iumo their intervals and their places lu line, no that thoy may not, by crowding, ncedliesly expose llicmselvrs to the lire of the enemy. Article Foiiuth. TnS BALLV. t'a«-.. biime!f In the group nearest I serving for mutual snpirart. The four men in ea.'b gionp will comr t^ n r^ndy fire as occa&ion may ofTjr, aAd I load without i ■ ' ' r feet. ] l.Tt. Thee fj of •cclions will each cause the four iii»;i .to his guard to form square, tl.e ni ■ ii^io enable lilm and the bugler ; topli. in the centre. Tho throe eerg-anls I wlilc. , .... bini iu ' : < III 131. \Vlieii' ■ jitdg" these squares loo I weak, but sli .> pon.tion by sti«ngtbeu- ii.g his Iiuo, be «,ii ,.hm.y tccliont. y.Vl. At this command, the chitb of sections will move rapidly on the centre group of Ihiir rcppottive tectious, I or on any other'nt<-rlor sToup w'>o»e pOKition miitht otlrr I a «helt'-r, or othf-r jurticul ir nd-ant'igo; the sl£lrml«heri I will c?.t, in ord' r t > indicate the point on wliii'li the rally is t) I e mnde. The other skirmtsherp, n« they nrrivi", will occupy and fill tlie open angular spaces j between these four men, ard snccessiroly rally around I ttii" first nticl-OH, and in surh roann< as occasion may offer, and load without moTiag tneii I fiet. I VA'i. The captain will move riipid'y with his guard, I wlierovcr be may judge his presence most necessary. I 134. Tho cflloere and sorjieiints will be piirticnlar to I observe that ihorally is made in Bilence, and with promp- I titude and order ; that some pieces in each of their sub- I divisions ba at all times loaded, and that the fire In I directed on those points only where it will bo most ■ eflective. i;i5. If the reserve hIioiiIiI bo Ihrea'eued, it Will form ! into a circle around the chief. I 130. If the captain, orcomman''cr ofallne rf pkirmish- I ers formed of many pIato.in<, shotild judge that the rallv I by section does not off.r sulTicient resinlano, be will I cause the rally by phitf.<,ns to bo%iccu!fd and for thi-t purpose, will command : To form Cohiinn. 127. A comhsny deployed as hkirmishors, iii rallied in order to oppose the enoniy \rtth l>etfer success; the rallies are made iit a run, and with bayonnts fixed ; when ordered to rally, the skiruiishers li.x bsyohets without command. 121. There «r>' fevoral ways of ralying, which thochlef of the line-irill adopt according to circumstances. 120. If Ibo lin^ marching or at » halt, bo merely di^<- turbed by scattend I'orfeiiien, it will not 1 e nec^>.'■^ar.'» lo tall bi ck on tho reserve, but the captain will cause biiyo. • nets to be fixed. If the horsemen shouM, however, ad- vancA to charge the skirmishers, the ca)>tHin will oni- raand, raWv Jij; fours. Tlie lino will hull if marching, and the four men of each group will execute :hl8 rally in the follow ing manner : ibelrunt rauli man of theevi-n numbered file will take the position of guard apainul cavalry; the rear rank man of tho odd numbered file will also take tho poHiliot of guard a'jtfinsl c^vnlry, tin n- ipi; his back to him, his right foot tliirto.-n inches from the right loo of the former, and pariillel to it ; the front rank "'*n of the odd file, and tho rear rank man of th,) eveu fl'^t will also flace tluniselves back to back, taking a like position, and between tho two men alrea'^y oslab- liehed) fscii g 10 theriglit and left ; tho right leetoftho four men will be brongbt together, forming a square, and EciUy hij iihiloons. I 137. This movement will be executed ai!Cording to tho ■ same principles, and liy the same means, as tho rnlly by sections, 'i'he cliicfn of platoon will conform to whitthss '< been prescribed for the chiefs of section. I 138. The captain wishii IT lo rally the skirmishers on I the reserve, will couiniaii I 'rin square ; for this purpose, Im will onso tUo half fecti IIS on t! e flank to te thrown I perpendicularly t,» tho rear; h" will order tho raen to ' come to a reudy. 110. The HklrniiHhors cf each Beciioii, taVing the run, will form rapidly into pronps, and upon that niau of each I group who is nearest the center of the Hection. These j;roups will direct thinirtelves diiicron.dly towards each oilier, and in surh manner as to form inlc^ is facing to the rear will face about without command. Tha guides will place themselves on the right hn 1 Uft of their respective platoons, those of the second platoon will place themselves at half distance from those of the first, counting from the n.-ar rank. These dispositions being made, the captain can move tho columu in whatever direction he may judge proper. 145. If he wishes to march it in retreat, he wil1|ccm- mand : 1. Til retreat. 2. M.^rch (or double ijMici — March). * 140. At th(> command march, the column will imme- diately fAce by the rear rank, and move off in the opposite direction. As soon as the column is in motion, the captain will command : 3. Guide right (or left). 147. He will indicate the direction to the leading guide; th«>gnido« will march at their proper distances, and the men will keep aligned. 148. If again threatened by cavaUy, tho cnptain will command : 1. Fbrt» "tufirf.. 2. March. 149. At tho command march, the colnnin will h.ilt; the first pUtooii will face about briskly, aud the outer half Hectious of eich platoon will be thrown pf^rpendicularly to the rear, so as to form the second and third fronts of the square. Tli« ffTicers and sergeants will promptly rectify any irrnguUrities which may be committed. 150. If hffl should wish to mirch thecolnmn in advance, the capiaia will command : 1. Form column. 2. M\Ecir. 151. Which will be executed as prescribed Xo. 144. 153. The column l)«ing formed, the captain will com- mand : 1. Foricnril. 2. Maucii (or double qiiiri: — Maecu). 3. Guide Uj'l (or right), 163, At the second command, the column will move firward. and at the third command, the men will take the tonch of elbows to thi> side of the gui'le. 154. If tlm captain should wish the column to gain ground to tho right or loft, he will do so by rapid wheels to \)ioi side opposite the guije. and fur this" purpose, will change the guide whenever it miy be necessary. 1'p5. If a company b' in column by platoon, at lialf distance, right In front, the captain can deplov the first platoon as skirmishers by the means already explained ; but if it should be his wish to deploy the second platoon f rwardon the centre file, leaving the first platoon in re- serve, ho will command : I. Second platoon — as skirmishert. 2. On the ceittrefile — take intervals. 3. March (or dotible quick — March). luG. At the first crimmand, the chief of the first platoon will camion his platoon to stand fast; the chiefs of sec- tions of the second platoon will place themselves bpfore the centre of their sections: tho fifth sergeant will place himself one pace in front of the centre of the second platoon. 157. At the second command, the chief of the rieht sec- tion, second platoon, will commat^d : Section right face ; the chief of thi^ left section : Section left face. 158. At the command march, these sectiors will move off briskly in opposite directions, and having unmasked the first platoon, the chiefs of sections will respectively command: Vy the Ifflfnnk—^lKTicu, and By the right Jlaiik — March; nnd as soon as these sections arrive on the alignment of the first platoon, they will command: As shinnisScrs — March. The groupH will then deploy »rcr>rd- ing to prescribed principles, on ths right group of the loft section, which will be directed by the fifth sergeant on the poirt indicated. ISO If the captain should wish the deployment made by the flank, the second platoon will be moved to the front by the mean« abeve stated, and halted after passing some steps beyond the alignment of the first platot.n ; the deployment will then be made by the fiank according to the prirciples prescribed. 1(50. When one or more platoons are deployed as skir- mishers, and the cartain should wish to rally them on the battalion, be will command: Rally on the battalion. im. At this command, the skirmishers and the reserve, no matter what position the company to which they be' long may occupy in order of battle, will rapidly nnmask the front of the battalion, directing them«elvfs in a run toward its nearest flank, and then form in its rear. 1C2. As soon as the skirmiiihers have passed beyond the line of file closers, the men will take the quick step, rfnd the chief of each platoon or section will re-f«rra his sub- division, and place it in column behind the wing on which it is ra'lied, and at ten paces from tho rank <»f file closers. These subdivisions will not be moved except by order ot the commander of tho battalion, who may, if he thinks proper, throw them into line of batt'e at the extremitifs of the line, or in the intervals betweeii the battalions. 103. If many platoons should be united behind the same wing of a battalion, or bhind any shelter whatsoever, they shou'd be formed always into clo.-Je colnmn, or Into column at half distance. Iti4. When tho batta'ion, covered by a company of skirmishers, shall le formed into square, the platoocs and sections of the covering company will be directed by their chiefs to the rear of the square, which will be opened at the angles to receive the skirmishers, who will be then form' d into <^se column by platoons in rear of the first: front of tWsquare. ITiS. If circumstances should prevent tho angles of the square from being opened, fh!oyeJ, tbt In prefcribed, No. 157 ; ns (■ luaaked tbecolmnn or aquan-. one on tbo right, the other on i: . TTu a';emhly. 1C9. A company dcpl^v'- ' -- ^'•'- — ■-' -- -■ " ' > w l>l»d wbcD tliero ia n<> L uJ ; the iiancmbly wiil 1 170. The cA]>lKia wirln-^; t^p Jl^MIUl.'J u.' run iai:-ii' rs uD Iho reaetTo, will commaud : An'in'Ae oi (7i« roerre. 171. At (bi8 comtDand, tlip ekirmislicrg will a.s8rinbIo by RToapa of four* ; the front roiik men will placo thnnsolvos l>ohind tbeir rear rank mcu ; and each trnu| b of four will direct itaelf on the reBcrvo, whore facb will lukeKs prmx-r place in the ranks. When the company is ro-formod, it will rejoin the battalion to which it belongs. 172. It may bo also prosier to aHHcmblo tbs Rkirm!«herH on the centre, or on the right or left of the lino, cilbor luarchini; or at a halt. 17^t. If the captiiin shonld wish to aR^emblo them on the centre while mrmaiion. Am they Kucceshively arrive, the skirmishers will Rni.; ..rl arms. Abtioli Fifth. 7b ilfpXoy a halliUon a$ sl-irmitliers, cud to r.xlti/ this h^Ualion. To deploy the hatlalion at sJ;irmMers. 178. A battilion being in lino of bafffc, if the com- mander 8houH wish to deploy it on the right of tho eixih cumpany, holding thit thruu right conipunies in nsurvo, ho willhignify his intention to the lieutenant-colonel and adjntaut, and also to the niiijor, who will be di'-ecteil to take charge of tho reserve, lid will point out to the liuutenunt-colonel tho direction ho wishes toglvo tho line, ;is well as tho point whtire lie wihlios the right of tbo ni\tli company to rest, and to tin- commander of tho re- Knrvn tho place he niav wish it ostiiblished. 170. Tho lientenant-colon>d will move rapidly in front of the right of the sixth company, and tli-j adjutant in front of tho left of the sam ■ company. The commander (if the reserve will dispose of it iu tho umuner to bo here- inafter indicated. 180, The colonel will command : 1. Firs' (or t.eco»d) platoons— an fiinnixlicrii. 2. On the right of Ihi- airlU compmiy—lahe inlrrvalf. ■''. Maeoii (or Juiihlc yHiV/.— ftlAuon). 181. At the second eommand, tho captains of the fifth and sixth companies will prepare to deploy tho flriit p!. omp&uics, the aixthoj its 1 ..- . urth company will face it to the ri^ht, aud iho cuptHiiisof the seventh and eighth conipuuica will face their ieKi)cctlTe compani s to the lea. 163. At the command m companies will afterwsrds deploy their first pi itoons on the right file. 1^6. The guides who conduct the flies on which tl o deployment is made, should be careful to direct them- selves towards the onlnr man of the neighboring company, alre^dy deplojed ft^ skirnit-hers ; or if tho company has not finished its deployment, they will Judge carefully tho distance which may still lo required t^ place all thoso files in line, and will th'U mirch on the point thus ni rked out. The companies, as they arrive on the line, will align themselves on those already denlcyrd. IBCi. The lieutenant colonel and adjutant will fellow tho deplo.^ment, the one on the right, tho other nn tho left; the movement concluded, the-y will place theiusedveti near tho colonel. 187. Tho reserve < of the company will be established in echellon iu the following manner: th" reserve of the Kixtli company wdl be placed one hundred and flity pacos In rear ef tho right of this ctmpan>; the reserves of (ho fourth and fifth companies, united, opposite tlie> center of their line of fkirmish-'rs, lai.l thirty prices in advance of the reserve of the aixth company ; the recervcs of the Bevonth and oigbth companies, also united, op|Hi reserve of tho sixth company. IBS. The major commanding the companies evimpoHing tho reserve, on receiving an order from tho colonel to tlmt effect will march these companie* thirty paces to tha rear, an.I will then pby ttuni into column Ly company, at lalf distance: after which he will conduct the column to the point which cliall have been indicated to him. IS'.t. The colimel will have a geueriil superintendenco of the movement ; and when it is finished, will move to a point in rear of tbo liiie, whence his view may bolt em- brace all the parts, in onUr to direct their movemonts. 100. If, insle-ad of i"e 'loving forward, it l>e I'esirnd to de])loy by the flank, the Kixtli ami fifth companies will bu moved to the front tenor twelve paces, hitlt> d, and de- ployed by the II ink, the one on the right, tin- iilher ou the left file, by themeans already indicated. Kacb of tbe> other companies will be marched by the Hank; and as Hoon as the last file of the company, next townids tli.< i direction, shall have taken its Intervals, it will be moved upon the lino established by tho iifth and sixth cejmpn- nii's, halted, and deployed. 101. In the preceding example.it hns bee-n suppoprd llmt tho battalion was in order of battle; btit if in col- umn, it woidd bo d< ployed as skirnilsherH by the same commands, and acfording toihe same |)ri»ici|deR. 102. If tho deplojtnent Is to bo made /onoa >•. SclKK'tmll. CALLS FOll SKIIfMlSHKKS. 1. i'lj Liv/, ii. UnlLr hayiintt. :i. (^'UCil' lint''. "i. 5'A« run. 7; J-'urinarU. 8. 7ii ntrciit. 9 i/a«. hi. Jin the riglU flan/.. 11. ;;j//fte hjlflaiil: 12. ( owtnCTir* firiiig'. IJ. fi//;/ on //«? InttoVfi. 2:i. .leftirtt/o on hands of the dklonel: b\it if there be davliKhl, ami time, Ihecnlor will be produced with due Boleiniiity. Cutnpoiition and i,iarch of the color-t*eort. 4. When thehattalinn turns •«t under arms, and the Color is wanted, a conipuny, other than that of the color, will be put in march to reciivf and escort if. .1. The march will be in the followinft order, in •julck time, and without muhic ; the field music, ful lowed by the band; the escort In column by platoon, tight in ItonI, wjih arms on tli'i rii;Ut shoulder, and the color-tx-arer between the platoons. C. Arrived in front of the tent or qaarteri of the colonel, the escort will form lino, the field maaic an4 hand on the ri^ht, annel wilt cause arius to be presented, and to the color Id be nonudod, which boinK ex- ecuted, the color-bearer wlil take his place in the front ruuk of the color-guard, and the bnttulion, by command, shoulder arms. 12. The escort, field niusic, and baml, will return in quick time to their several places in line of battle, marching by the rear of the battalion. 13. The color will be eseortod back to the colonel's tent or qnarters in the aboTe order. General linles ami Diclshii 6/ iJie ^Choot oj the Baltalinti. M. This school has for Its oljccl the it1^t^urtlon of bat- talions singly, iaud thus to luapiro thom for manoeuvres in line. The harmony »o iudisiiensable in tho movements ot luauy battalions, can only be attained by the use of tho same commands, the paiiie princiides, and the same means of execution. Utnco, all colonels and actual commanders of batUilion will conform themselves, with- out addition or curtailment, to what Will henin be pro- scribed. 15. Whon a battalion instructed In this drill shall manrtjtivre in line, tho colonel will reputato its move- ments, .18 pieflcribcd in tin third volume of the TaolioB for he.tvy infantry. ...,,.. .. 10. Tho school of th5 battalion will bo divided into five P*''*3. . . , ... 17. Tho first will comprehend opening and riofing ranks, and tho execnt'on of the difterent fires. IS. Tho scconil, the different modes of passing from the order in battle, to the order in column. 1!». Tho third, tho march in column, anM llie ither movements incident thereto. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION-- PART 1. 43 20. Xho fourth, tha differeDt modes ot pasfticg from tbe order in celuma to the order in battle. 21. The fifth will comprehend the roan: b in lineof bat- tle, in advance and in retreat; tbe passage uf defiles in retreat ; the march by the flank : thcformatidn by file into line of battle ; the change of front ; the column doablel on the centre; dispositions against cavalry; the rally, and rnles for manc^uvring by the rear rank. PXm FIRST. Cpeniiig and dc.^iug ranks, and the cj-ccnthn of Hit dijfercnl fires. Article Fibst. To open and to close ranks. liJ. The tolotel, wishing tbe ranks to be opoocd, will command : 1. rtepare to open ranks. 2.'.. At this command the lieutenant colonel and majer will place thpmselveo on the right of the battalion, the tirst on the Hank of the file clofers, and the second fonr paces from the front rank of tbe battalion. 24. These dispositiona being made, tbe colonel will command : 2. To the rear, open order. Z. Mabcu. 26. At the second command, the covering sergeatts, and the sergeant on the left of the battalion, will place themselves f(.nr paces In rear of tbe front r.-ink, and opposite their places in line of battle, in order to mn'-k the new alignment of the rear rank; they will bs aligned by the major on the left sergcnnt of the battal'on, who will be rareftrt to place himself exactly four paces in rear of the front rank, and to hold his piece between the eyes, eroct and inverted, the better to indicate te the nisjoT the direction to be given to the covering ser- ceanta. 26. At the command marcJi, the rear rank and the file closers will step to the rear without counting steps ; the men will pass a little in rear of the line traced for this rank, halt, and dress forward on the covering sergeants, who will align correctly the men of their respective companies. 27. The file closers will fall back and preserve the dis- tance ef two pac^s from the rear rank, glanring eyes to the right ; the lieutenant colonel will, from tbe right, align them on the file closer of the left, who, having placed himself accurately two paces from the rearrjnk, will invert his piece, and hold it up erect between bis eyes, the better to be seen by the lieutenant colonel. 28. The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will co:ii- iiiand : 4. Fbost. .Kt this command, the lieutenant colonel, mnjor, and the left sergeant, will take their places in line of battle. 2!). Tbe colonel will caase the ranks to bo closed by the commands prescribed for ilu; instructor in the school rt the company, No. 28. Aeticle S£eo:«D. JTanual of arms. ■ >0. The ranks being closed, the cc lonel will .'cjuiso the following times and pauses to be executed : JW'rnt arntf,. Order arms. Support arm*. Fix hatjoncl. Charge btpoiitl. Unfix hoyoni-l. t^houldcr vrrm. ."shoulder ar»is. .■>/i/-iiWer ar]ns. f'hnulder ariiii, ShiiuUfcr anna. Shoulder ttthiK. Abticli: laiBD Loadiur/ at will, and tite Firiv^s. M. The colonel will next cause to be executed loading at will, by the commands prescribed in tbe 8<'ho company No. 45 ; the ofticers and sergeants in the rank? will face to the right with tbe men at the eighth time of loading, and will face to the Iront when the men next to tfaem come to a shoulder. Si. The colonel will cause to be executed the fire \>y company, the fire by wing, the fire by battalion, the fir* by file, and the fire by rank, by the commands to !■•' herein indicated. 3S. The fire by company and the fire by file will h1w«j« be direct ; the fire by battalion, the tire by w og, and the fire by rank, may be either direct cr oMique. 04. When the fire ought to be oblique, the colonel will give, at every round, the caution right (or le/t) oblique, between the c^ramandi' ready and aim. 3d. The fire by company will be executed alternately by the right and left companies of each division, as if the divisioa wtre alone. The right compapy will fire first ; the captain of the left will not give his first command tin he shall see one or two pieces at a ready in thn right company; the captain of the latter, after tbe first dis- charge, will observe the same rule in reepect to the left company ; and the fire will thus be ccnlinned alternately. o6. The colonel will cbaerve the same rule in the firing by wing. '.Vi. The fire by file will commf nee in all the ccmpanies at once, and will be executed as has been prtfcribed in the school of the company No. J5 and following. The fire by rank will be executed by each r»nk alter- nately, as has been prescribed in (ho school of the com pany No. tS and the folk wing. 38. The color-guard will not fire, but reserve itself for the defense of the color. The fire hjfciitu^iiy. 39. The colonel wishing the flre by coiupaui lu be exe- cuted, will command : 1. Fire hij compaiiy, 2. Cjinmence f.riiitj. 40. At the first command, the captains and tovtriug sergeants will take the poeitions indicated in the school of the company No. 49. 41. The color and its guard will step back at the fame time, so as to bring the front rank cf tbe guard in a line with the rear rank of the battalion. T/jm rii/« it general for (HI the different firings. 42. At tbe second conimand, the odd numbered compa- nies will commence to fire ; their captains will each give (he commands prescribed in tbe echo< I of (he company No. 50, observing to precede the command coiii^an^/ 1 y that of first, third, fifth or secenlh, according to the number of each. 43. The captains of the even nnmb^red companies will give, in their torn, the same coramands, observing to precede them by tbe nnmber of tb^ir respective coxnpa- nieB. 44. In order that the odd numbercil companies may not all fire at once, their ciptains will observe, but only for the first discbarge, to give the oommand fi^e one after another; tlms, the captain of the third cimpany will not give the command fire until he Iws heard the fire of the first company; the captain of the fifth will observe the same ru'e with respect to the third, and ihe captiin of the seventh the same rule with respect to the third, and the captain of the seventh the same rule with respect to the fifth, io. The colonel will cause the fire toceaseby the sound to cease firing ; at this sonDd, the men will execote what is prescrited in the echod of the company No. tJS: at the ^ouud, for oQlccrs to take their places after firing, the captains, covering sergeants, and color-cuaid, will promptly resume their places in line of battl*: litis rvh' if (/eiitral for all the firiny. 44 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART II. The /ire tij teiiig. 46. Whun th« cHonel •hall wiih (his flrn to he exo- < uted, he will command: I. Firt hy iriity. •_*. Right iciny. 3. Keapt. 1. Am. 5. FlBE. C. 1.0 *P. 47. The I' I'^nrl will cause (br wines to fire alternately and hn will rpcnmmeDce the tiro l.y the commands, 1. lii-lhl tring ; 2. Aim; 3 Fire; 4. Load. 1. Lfft irinf/ ; '2. Aim; 3. Fire, 4. I,i>aii; in coiifi)rming to what is prescribed No. 36. The fire hy hattnlion. IS. Th»- coloni I will can«5 this flro to do oxecutpil by the comma' ds last prescri bod. Kubstituting for the first two, I. Fire h>i Inttalirnt ; 2. UMalion. The fire hy file. 49. To cause this to be exocnted, tho colonel will com- mand: 1 . Fire hy file. liat/alioH. 3. BcASY. 1. Commcnee firing. ■V). At thv> fjurth command, tho flro will commence on llio riicht of .->ach compiny as prescribed in the school of tho comnany No .IT. The colonel may, it he thinks pro per, cans? the fire to commence on the right cf each pla- toon. The fire hy ran);, fit. To caase this fire to be czecntod, the colonel will command : 1. Fire by rank 2. BaUaXion. 3. Beadt. 4. Hear rnnl: 5. Aim. C. i'lRB. 7. Load. 62 This fire will be executed as has boon explained in the school of tho company No. 59, in foilowiu;; the pro- gression prescribed for the two ranks which should (ire alternately. To fire hy the rear rank. .53. When the colonel shall wl;h the battalion to (ire to the rear, he will command : 1. Face hy Ihe rear rank. J)altaUon. 3 Ahoul — Face. 54 At the first command, the captains, covering sor- •;eants, and file closers will oxecme what has been pre- Kcribed in the school of the company No. fi9 ; the color- boaror will pass into therear rank, and for this pnrposo, the corporal ef his file will step before the corporal next on his right tn let the color-bearer pacs, and will then lake his place in the front rank; tho lieutonant coloml, adjutant, major, Borjroant maj t, and the music will place themBelves before the front rank, and face to the roar, each opposite his place In the line of battle — tho flriit two pASsine around Ihe right, and the others around the left of the battalion. 65. At the third command, tho battalion will lice about ; the captains and covering sprge.iutH observing what is prescribed in tho school of tho con pany No. 70. !>(i. The battalion facinf? thus by tho rear rank, tho roljiicl will cause it to executo the different fires by the same commands as if it wore faced by the front rank. fi7. The rlRht and left winfts will retain tho same doBij;- nations, althrugh faced about; the companies also will preserve their former designations, as first, second, third, *c. 58. The fire by file will commence on the left of each company, now become the rlRht. 59. The fire by rank will cnmmenci by the front rank, now become the rear rank. This rank will preserve its denomination. 60. The captains, covering screeants, and color-guard will, at the first command given by the colonel, take the places prescribed for them i.i tho fires, with the front rank leading. ^Gl. The colonel, after firing to Ihe roar, wishing to face the battalion to ill proper front, will command : I. Filer hy iMe /roiU r5. When the colonel shall wish to cause arms to bo stacked, ho will bring the battalion to ordered arms, aad then command : 1. Slack— Arus. 2. Break ranks. 3. Mabiii. 65. The colorol wishing the men to re'urn to the ranks, will cause ro8Crlbed in the school of the company No. 173; each captain will conform himself to what is prescribed for the chiefs of platoon ; the left guide, as soon as ho can pass, will place himself on tho left of the front rank to conduct the marching Hank, and when he elriU have appi'oached near to the perpendicular the captnin will command : 1. Such com- jMnij. 2. Halt. 72. At tho second command, which will be given at the instant the left guidf shall be at the distance of three paces from tho pcrpeniliculur, tho company will halt; the guide will advance and place his left arm lightly against the breast of tho captain, who will establish him on the alignment of the man who has faced to tho right; the covering sergeant will place himself correctly on the alignment on the right of that man ; which being execu- ted, tho ciptain will align his company by the left, command Fro.nt, and place hinnelf two paces before its center. 73. The captains having commanded KnoNT, the guides, although some of them may not bo in the direction of the precedinit guides, will stand fawl, in order that the error of a company that has wheeled too much or two little may not be propagated: the guides not in tho directijn will readily come into it when the column is put in march. 74. A battalion in line of battle will break into column by company to tho left, according to the sane principles, and by inverse means; the covering Bergeant of each SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART II. 45 company will conduct the marching flank, and the left Koide will place himself on the left of the front rank Bt the moment the company halts. _ 75. When the battalion breaks by division, the indica- tion division will be substituted in the commands for that of rumiyamt ; the chief of each division (the senior cap- tain) willconform himself to what is prescribed for the chief of company, and will placehimself two paces before the center of his tlivision; the junior captain, if not already there, will place himself in thf interval lietween the two companies in the front rank, and be covered by the covering sergeant of the left company in the rear rank. The right guide of the right company will be the right guide, and the left guide of the left company, the left g\iide of the division. 76. When the battalion shall break by platoon to the right or to the left, each first lieutenant will pass around the left of his company to place himself in front of the second platoon, and for this purpose, each covering ser- geant, except the one of the right company, will step, f>rthe moment, in rear of the right file of his company. 77. When the battalion breiiks by division to the right, and there is an|odd company, the captain of this company, (the left"!, after wheeling into column, will cause it to obliqne to the l^ft, halt it at company distance from the preceding division, place his left gui.le on the direction of the column, and then align his company by the left. When the line breaks by division to the left, the odd company will bo in front ; Its captain, having wheeled it into column, will cause it to oblique to the right, halt it at division distance from the division next in the rear, place his right guide on the direction of the other guides, and align the company by the right. 78. Thp battalion being in column, the lifntenant col- onel andmajir will place thenipelves on the directing flank, the first abreast with the leading subdivision and the other abreast with the last, and both six paces from the flank. The adjutant will l)e near the lieutenant colanel, and the serif ant mfljo- near th<> major. 70. The colonel will hive no fixed place as the instructor of his battalion; but in columns composed of many bat- taljonH, he will place himself habitually on the direct- ing flank fifteen or twenty paces from the guides, and abreast with the centra of his battalion. 50. Wlipn the colonel sliall wish to move the column forward without halting it. he will caution the battalion to that efl'ect, and will command : 1. Z>7 company, right wheel 2. March (or double quick — MABcn ) 51. At tlie first command, the captains of companies will execute what is prescribed for breaking into column from a halt. 82. At th!> second command, they will remain in front of their companies to superintend the movement ; the com- panies will wheel to the right on fixed pivots as inncated in the school of the company No. 185 ; the left guides will conform to what is pr scribe"' above; when they shall arrive near the perpendicular, the colonel will command: 3. Forwii-d. 4. Mabch. 6. Guide left. ?o. At the thiri command, each covering serjeant will place himself by the right side of the man on tlie right cf the front rank ot his company. At the f.inrth com- mand, which will given at the instant when the wheel is completed, the companies will cease to wheel and march Btmlght forward At the fifth, the men will tike the touch of elbows to the left. The leading guide will march in the direc!if>n indicated to him by the lientenant coo- nel. The guides will immediate'y conform themselves to the principles of (he march in column, school of the com- pany No. 200 and followiiig. 8-4 If the battalljon bi' marching in line of battle, the colonel will cause it to wheel to the right or left, by the same commands and the suma means ; but he should pre- viously caution the I attalion that it is to coutinue the march. 85. A battalion in line of battle will break inte colnmn by company to the left, according to the same principles and by inverse means ; the covering sergeant of each company wfll conduct the marching flank, and the left guides wi 1 place themselves on the left of their respective companies at the command forward 8rt. When a battalion has 'o prolong itself in column towards the right or left, or )\as to direct its march in column perpendicularly or di»gonally in front, or in rear of either flank, the colonel will cause it to break by com- pany to the right or left, as has just been prescribed ; but when the line breaks to the right, in order to march towards the left, or therpverse. the colonel will command: Break lo the right to march to the Uft, or hrenlt to thf left to march to III'' right, before giving th'' command, hycompanii, rujht (or left) wheel. As soon ae the battalion is broken, the lientenant colonel will place a marker abreast with the right guide of the leading company. The instant the column is put in motion, this company will wheel to the left (or right) ten paces to the front without chang- ing the gnide. and wheel again to Ihfl left Cor richt.) The second VI heel being completed, the captain will im- mediately command giiide left for right.) The guide of this company will march in a direction parallel to the guides of the column. The lieutenant colonel will be careful to place a second marker at the point where the first company is to change direction the eecon * time. Article Second. To hreak to the rear, by the right or left, itito column, and lo advance or retire by tlie right or left o/companie'. 87. When the colonel shall wish to cause the battalion to break to the rear, by the right, into column by com- pany, he will command : f 1. By the right of companies to the rear into column. 2. Bat- talion right— Tacb. 3. MABCH(ortfoH6fc5t7. At the command march, the coni)iHuieH will face to the left, and march in column in the uew direction. The captains will place tbemselTe!< in front of the centres of their respective companies. At the fourth command, the guides will conform to the principles of the march in ( olumn ; the leading one will more in the directi>>n indi- cated to him by the lieutenant colonel. The men will take the touch of elbows to the left. 98. To break to the rear by the left, the colonel will i;ivo the same commands as iu the case cf breakiui; to the rear by the right, substituting the indication H'/, for that of rif/bt. '.t"*. The movement will be executed Recording to the Mame principles. Kach captain will ba'utie, ai.coi'diDg to tlu indication given, taking care to |>re«erve accurately hit dittAuce. 100. If the ( olnnol Fh iiM wish to move to the frpnt, o rear, by the left companies, tbo movemenl will >>e exer cutod by the rume nuaiis and the samo commands, sub- siitutine left {orri-jU. 110. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel shoolil wish to advance or retire by the right of compa- nies, ha will cummand : 1. liy the right of cofnpattie* to Oic front (jr r«lr1. J. Jioutation, hy Ou rifjhl flank. 3. Marou (or doubl'- quick— ilAion). 4. Guide right (left) or {centre). 111. Wlilch will be executed accord inir to the princi- ples and means prescribed Nos. PO and following, and lOi. and following. At the first command, the color and gen- eral guides will take their places as in c-lunin. 112. If the C'llonel should with to advance or retire by the left companies, the movement will be executed by the 8ame means and the same commands, substituting t^ ftir right. 113. If the bftttnlion bo advancing by the right or left of companies, and the olonel should wish to form line to the front, he wilt command : 1. /fy compani'"!' into Une. i. M'RCB (or ilouhle quick— MAncn). 3, Ouicle ctntre. 114. At the command ni hereinafter prescribed No. lori. \ lUi. Iflho battalion be re'iring by the right or left of companies, and the colonel should wish to form lino farlu;; the enemy, he will lirst cause the companiea to face about while marching, und immediately form in' line by the r<,i,n , ii.i. .firl iii<-.i IIS prescribed Xoi. 1 l.'I ami fullowiug. Aai iLB TuiaD. T'.i xil"ij Oil hati'iliun into cloic coUintH. 117. This movement may be executed by couip,»ry or by division, on the right or l.ft subdivision, or on any other subdivision, ripht or left in front. U.S. The examples in this school will suppose tho presence of four divisions with directions for an odd com- pany ; but what will be prescribed lor fuir, will serve equally lor two, thiee ci live divivions. 119. To ploy the battalion into close column by division iu rear of (ho first, (he colonel will command : 1. Close column, h>i liiviKtun, 2. (tu iJie first rfieiVion, right i,i front. :t. BatLilion, right — K.icE. 4. March (or double (/Ill'tA— M.^Bl'H.) 120. At the BccMud conimaurt, all the chicfti of division will place themsolvpH befn-e the centres of their divlslorB ; th» chief of the first will caution it to stand fist; the chiefb of tho throe othfrit will remind tlum that they will have to face to the rinht,aiul the covering sergeant of the right company ofeach Uivisiim will replace his captain iu the front rauk, as eo>m us the latter steps out. I'Jl. At the third command, Ihn last thre< division*! will facs to tho rinht ; tho chief of Ciich Oiviaiou will haston to its right, and cause the lllex lo be broken to the rear, as indicated No (iO ; the riulit guide will break at tho same time, and place himsell l..^'.irt. tlio ftont rauk man of the first file, to conduct him, nud oaoh ohief of di- vision will place himself by the sidw of this guide. 122. At tho mou eut these divisions face to the right, the junior captain in each will place himself on the left of tho covering sorgoaut of tho loft cojurauy, who will place oimsolf in the froit rauk. 'i'Uiis rrk ia gcneml for all tin- X)li'!/mcuta 111 diiitivit. U'iJ. At tbo command vimch, the chief of the first divi- sion will add. (fuide left; at this. Ha left guide will place himself ou tlie left, as noon as (he movement of tho SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION—PART II. 47 second division may permit, and the (lie closers will ad- TSDce ono pac« upon the rear rank. 124. All the other diTisions, each conducted by its chief, will step off together, to take their j.laces in the colnmn ; the second will gain, in wheeling by file to the rear, the space of six pacps, which ought to separate its ^ide from the guide of the first division, and so direct its march as toeuter the column on a line parallel to this division; the third and fourth divisions will direct them- selves diagonally towards, but a little in rear of, the points at which they ought, respectively, to entT the column; at six paces from the loft flank of the column, the head of each of these divigiouH will incline a little to the left, in order to enter, the column as has just been prescribed for the second, taking care also to leave the distance of six p*ces between its guide aud the guide of the preceding division. At the moment the divisions put thomselven in march to enter the column, the file closers of each «ill incline to the left, so as to bring themselves to the liistauce of a pace from tlio rear rank. 125. Each chief of these three divisions will conduct his division till he shall be up with the guide of the di- recting one; the chief will then himself halt, see his division file past, aud halt it the instant the last lite xball have passed, commatidiag : 1. I'-Vc./t diiitioii; 2. Halt; •'!. Front ; 4. X, fi!-oii<— Face. 140. At this, the guides, who are feced to the rear, will face to the front. 111. To ploy the battalion in rear, or in ft-ont of the fourth dirisijn, the colonel will command : 1. Close column h>i (lirixion. 2. On the fourth divmoti, left (or rir/ht) in front. 3. Vnttallon, left, — FACE. 4. MabOH (or (toubk quick — Maech}.. 14'2. These movements will be executed according to the principles of those which precede, but by inverse means: the fourth division on which the battalion ploys will stand f,tst; the instant tho movement commences, its chief will command, ijuidfi right (or hjt). 143. The foregoing examples erohiaco all theprin«iples: thus, when the colonel shall wish to ploy the battalion on an interior division, he will command : 1. C/iwo coliunn lnj (tivisioii. 2. On such dii-ision, ritjTU (or left) in front. 3. Buttnlion imcards—ifKOE. i. Maroh (or doiMe qiiicl: — Maroh). 144. The instant tho movement commences, the chief ofthe directing division will command, tjnidc hfl (or right). 145. The divisions which, in tho order in battle, are to the right of the directing division, will face to the lefc ; those which are to the lilt, will face to the right. lit). If the ri^ht is to be in front, the right divisions will ploy in front of the directing divisions, and the left in its ruar ; the reserve, if the lelt bo in front. And in all tho foregoing suppositions, the division or divisions coutiguous to the directing one, in wheeling br file to tho front or rear, will gain the space of six pa;e8, which ought to separate tlieir guides from the guide of the di- recting division. It". In all the ployiiients on an interior division, the lientonant-colonol will assure the positions of the guides in front, and Ihe major those in rear of the directing di- vision. 148. If the battalion be in march, instead of at a halt, the movement will be executed by combining the two gaits of i^uick and double quick time, and always in rear of one of the flank divisions. 140. Tho battalion being in march, to ploy it in rear of the first division, the colonel will command : 1. C/ftte column l/ii dinition. 2. On tho H'tl diiUion. .'!. i Battalion ~l>!/ Ihe right flank. 4. Vonhlc quick — March. I IJO. At the second command, each chief of division will j move rapidly 1 eforo the centre of his division and cau- tion it to face to tho right. 151. The chief of tho first division will caution it to continue to march to tho front, and he will command : I Quick march. 152. At tho command march, the chief of the flrst di- vision will comni!iM<\ Guide l< ft. At this, the left guide will move to the left flank of the division and direct him- self on the point indicated. l.')3. The three other divisions will face to fhe right and niova off in double (juick time, breaking to the right to take their places in cohiiun; each chief of division will movo rapidly to the right of his division in order to con- duct it. The files will be careful to preserve their dis- tances, and to march with a uniform and decided step. The color-bearer and general guides will retake their places in the ranks. 48 SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION- -PART II. IfA. The apcond dirlaion will immediately rnU>r the coIniDD marching parallel to the fint divinion; itiK'bief will allow ft tij fila patt bini, and when the last tile is aUreaat of bim, will command: 1. fifvond (innioTifby the U/l flank— 'SI ABC ft. 2. (Vt/We /c/l, and plaro liimsclf in front uf the centre ol hia division. 166. At the command marr'i, tko division \«'ill faca to the left; ftt the second command, the left i^nide will march in the trace of the lofc guide of the flrst divi*ion; the men will take the touch cf elbows to the loft. When the second division has cluse support arms after having aligned it and comiaanded Fbont. PART TQIBD. Article Fibst. To nmrc\ in column al full distance. llil. When the colonel shall wish to put the culiimn in niHrch, he will indicate to the leading guide two distinct objects in front, on the line wliicli the guide ought to fol- low. This guide will immediately put his bhoulders in a square with that line, take the more dintunt object as the point of direction, aud the nearer one as thj interme- diate point. 162. If only a single prominent object present itself in the directiou the guide has to follow, he uill face to it as before, and iuunediately endeavor to catch ou the ground some intermtdiuto point, by which to give steadiness to his march on the point of directiou. 163. There being no piominent object to serve as the p dnt of direction, the cnluuel will dispatch the lieutenant colonel or adjutant to jjlaco himself forty puces in advance, facing the column, and by ii nign of the swoid establish him on the direction ho niiiy wish tu give to the leading' 4;uido : that oflicer being tliiiH ]>lH('eil, this guide will titke him ai the point of directiou, conforming himself to what is prescribed in the school of Ilia company No. 87. Ib4. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 1. Column forward. 2. (iulde Irfl (or ri'jhl.) a. MAneii (or double quick — Mabcii.) ir5. Al the' command march, briMkly repeated by the chiefs of Bubdiviuiun, tlie column will place itself in march, cuciforming to what is prescribeU in the tchaol of the company No. 200 and following. IGC. The leading guide miiy always maintain himself correctly on the direction by keeping stoidily in view the two po.uts indicated to him, or chosen by himself; if these points have a certain elevation, ho may bo csuured be is on the true direction, when the nearer niaaks the more distant point. 107. The following guides will preserve with ezaclneta both step and distance; each will inarch tu the trace of the guide who immediataly precedes him, without iKCU- pying himself with th<' geutral direction. 168. The IjouU'uant cUmnl will hold hlniiioir, habitu- ally, abre.'ist with the leading guide, to Bee that he dous not deviate from the direction, and will observe, also, that the next guide marches exactly in the trace of Iha first. ICU. The mi^or will generally be aVrc-ast with the laat Kiibdivi!pagat(.d ; but he need not interfere, iu tbit way, unless the deviation haa become sensible, or material. 170. The column being iu inarch, the colonel will fre- quently cause the uhnui to be executed while marching ; to this eire:t, he will command: 1. j:.iHali,,ii.ri.ilit about. 'J. MaKCII. 171. At the second command, the compaiiieswill face to the right about, and the co iimn will then march forward In an opposite direction; the cliiefn of snlHlivlslon will remain behind the front rank, the tile closers in front of the rear rank, aud the jrnidea will place thenDilves In the same rank. The lieutenant colonel will remain abreast of the llrst division, now in rear; the major will give a point ot directioa to the leading guide, and march abreast of hiui. 172. The colonel will hold himself habitually on the diiecting flank ; ho will look to the stop and to the dis- tances, aud see that all the princij les prescribed for the march in column, school of the company, are observed. 173. These means, which the practice iu that school ought to have rendered familiar, will give sufliLient ex- actness to the direction of the column, aud also enable it to form ybnrurtj or/.iO(r, will iiii- tMediatfly diiTot hiiineir on tlii« pfint ; t)i ■ otlirr i.iii'lc » will only conform lli<>lii«flvf« to ihis ii.r.vriii' iit nn <■ i-h ■ l!r»t liad i-x.cnto'i it. If to the in.iTpnmonf of •honinnor ghortcniiig | -iii^ (throwing bnck) the- lint willioat loxttig the nrrivoi at tli<« jMjint - Kiich milrliTisJon wil' its guide, tlio men i ; iUp "fpp, and advanriM ... , ulinnlJcr oppojitB thn i;lilil tinrli of the cllwiw fow.'iriig his Hiil< 19C. The colnnui, hy rnnipnny, bi'inij In riarrli, tlip i-olonol will • CJHHf it to diniinisli front V.y pliitonn. Iro.n front to rear, at unce, and to incrf^^oo froni hj iiliiUxm in like manner, which niovcmontH will be coniniamlod and I'Xecutisl as prpKcribed In tin- Bchool of the compasy, Noh. ■_'S2 and 273 and foll^winir, chnnj,'ing tlio romnmud /'■■■m- rnmpany to /wrni rnmpanifii. So may ho incrpiiso and di- niinish.'or diminiHli and incrpasp front, iipiordint: to the name principlea and at one. l>y coniimny, changing Clip command /orm comprmirt to/orm th'ri.ii'nns, and tlip com- mand break into j^Momir, io break into enuipnnics. In this case, the companies and divisionR will oxponte what is prp'crihed for plat-nns and companips re«peclivply. I'tT. Thp colnmn lipinR at a halt, il tho colonel shonid wish to mnrrh it to the Tour. r»nd tho disl^nci" to l>i' ij:n)li>'d he so Inconsiderable ns to rend'Tii count' rmari h a dls,- proportionate loss of lime, he will rati"" Iho column -tb f;ico about, .Tnd then pot it in march by the oonimanda proscribed No. liil ; the chii-l'f of the snbdlTlsions will remain bihind the front rank, the flle elopers before tho rear ranV, and the puides will stop into thi- roarrdrk, ' now in front. Tn a colnmn, bv division, the junior 0!i;>- liins. in tliP intervals between companies, will i-eplacip tlioir coverins eert^oants In tho rpnr r.inlr. and those eer- fi-ants will stoji into the lino Of the ti' ■ » ' •■<-' •: front of their intervals. Aeticle Second. Column i» route. lOS. A column in routo, like a colnmij in. raijpoiuvre, oll^bt uevpr to have a dopth greater tl^an about fUefroiit it had occupied in tho Hue of battio, loss tho froui al' b Hubdivislon. 1!)0. Tho observanc" of this princiiilo requires no pnr- tic-ulnr rule for a column in manouvre ; but, as a col- umn in rrmlp miiy have hourly to pass narrow ways, bridxes, or other defiles, rendering it uece.ssary to d.lnin- i',!! the front of Bubdivinions. it bocoraes importout 'o Itive rules siud means by which tho colunin u.ay, lor iiuy leneth of march, preserve tho case of tho roUt«}. bteji without elouRtttion from front to rear. ' , : 200. A column in route will be habitually foriixojl'iliy- conipanv. 201. When a column in route sliall arrive at a pass too n:irron to receive tlie front of a company, tho c luinn will diminiHli front hy platoon before entering. Thin, movement will be executed succouBivcl), or hy all tlio cuuipanles at once. 202. If. however, tho dcfilo be very short, mid it mny l>o passed by the diminution of a few files, it will he preferable to break to tho rear tlio limited nunibur of tiles. ZtC Tho colnmn boinR by platoon, and the want of space renderiuK a further diuiiuiition of front Jipieseary, it will be diniinislied by section, if the platouusbe of t\yolTa or more (ilos. 20t. Th« column being by section, ^YiU 'puiilinpo to march V>y that front as long as the defllo may piirmit. 2(i5. If the platoons have less than twilvo files, one or two files will be hrukeu to tho rear, ntcurdlun to the nar- rowing; of the dtliie. and tho route sttp cuiit,iuiied as lou;^ as six tiles can march abicast. 200. Wlial has just been explained fvir hrenlduj^Jilic \n the rear in u column by platoon, ii ui^uully apjilicahli' ii< a column by section. , •, I , 207. ir the defile be too narrow to admit hix men to march abreast, the subdivisions will bo marched surces- • 1 wh.it i' wiuiu.iiitlB of too <.aptaiuK^«a their vcly clear the rteSle, ohtbhrili); iho 1 - .^, ;- . ' •' ' 2t)H. ^a Boon as tho way Is snlficlontly broad to contain six nicn nbreist, the cAptain will roniniaiid : 1 . 7*y section (or ly pJaloon) (tUo linr. . 2. KaSCV. 210. At tlr- ■ •:-■ — -' r"Trc7i, tho |tnb' = -- ' '■■ '" ■ 1 will form th' ■ line: tho 111 boon able tv Mow (Iiv th" fili-s of their f .. 1 1 .-I'M ' ' ■ •' ' ■ 211. Tho tuiumu marii reur win in- run-od to bread!'- '■ " ■ ; -1. ill. 212 u;: ly srf.lioti or hj* x\^'^'"'> jdatii v.i!l |.(' r..mud as soOti as the Iiroa'': ■• 2i:;. :!io winding's of th MS *»ill not occuj ; > 111 i !.•■ ., ' ■■' gion. rare of tho : theni ; Till mi-n \ bad I'ui.- . 1 11. • >• i.y, but pass, iw 1 r.is;.. :, in the diroctiim of his file. 214 Ch;ni;;es of direct! .n will nlw yslo r command; if tin clmnjre be fip:i -•■••. ■ fri m theri'..<5ppctivo chitfs to tie ■ ar ' tliP rear riink, as well n« il will execute SUCCesiivoly the UlL) I 111 -in ^^lule iiir m ; rank had exocuti'd it. . ,, 210. Th" colonel will hold hipiself at the head of (he bfiftnlion ; he will re.'rtiinto the step of the le.idinR sub- divi«ion, and indicato to its cliii^f the .iost^pt for oxe- cutin*; tho various muremcnta which the imtiirs bf th'> route may roudor uccoasAfy. i 216. If the column be c»ilil«8ed of severjil hntluli.). ench will coufuim itij'>lf in its turn, to w^t eb>iji b^ been couimnnded for t.v luadiug battalion. obsorviiiK " uxocnto each movcmout at tlio samo pliip<>, aud iu tlj'' «amo ui^uutr. < . - 217. Finally, to ruuuor 11m> m«qbaiu«i't of nU tliosp movements f.uiiiliar to the troaig,aud to babituute tluin to march in tli" routi' kIpp without aloiipatiiig tho col- UlUD, comiii.aidevs will guniiully cause their biittulions to march in this stop, going to, aud retuiiiiug from, llelds of oxerciKe. £acli will ocpiksionally civuduct dii-* battalion tbrou^U narrow passos, in order to make it per- !coiro tho utility of the piincijiles pretcribed above; ami 1)0 will sfveral tiunis, iu oviry course of iustructiun, lit.nruh in the route stop, aud caut>e to be exucu'od, su^eo- tinii B at once, and somi'tiiuos giiccessivcly, tlio divers iuovemeuts which have just been iuJicatid. denirnl vmarls on thr column in rnvtr. 218. Tho IcSRon relative totho culumnin route is, by its frei|UOUt application, one of the iinist important that can be givoa to troops. If it bo not well taught. and ef^- lablisbed on rinht principles, it »rill Impiien that the rear ot tho column in KUito will be eblire'l lo run, to ingniii distSLDces, or that the fnwit will be forced to halt till the rear shall have nciwrnplished that object ; thug rendering the march groiitly slower, or greatly more fatiguing, ('ouorally both, than if it wtro executed accord. ng to rule. 21!). Tho onlinary progrcsii of a column in routo ought to be, on good roads or good grounds, at the rate of one hundred and ten paces in a minute. Tliia rato may be easily niaintained by colon ns of almost any depth; but over bad roads, ploogbeJ fields, loose sands, or mouutain- ou.f districts, the progro«:K cannot be bo groat, and munt .lliorefore bo regiilaU-d ucrording to circumstances. 220. Tho iiioxi certain menne of marchina well in route, is to preserve ahvays a regular and equal movement, and. SCHOOL OIT THE BATTALION -PA IIT lii. if oUstiiclGS oblige ouo or more subdivisions to Bkickon or to shorten tho step, to cause the primitive rateuf march to bo resiimoil tho moment the difiiculties are p.i?-od. 221. A siibdiTision ought never to take »(.»■<• than the pri-scribed distance from tho sobdivision imrnidiately preceding; bnt it is sometimes neqess-ary to Icsfen ihut iliataucc. 222. Thus : tlie head of the eohimu CDcountei^ an ob- Bt;icle whicli ol)bf^«3 it to relax its wircb ; all tl^' follow- ing subdivisioDB will preserve tho habitual step, and ilose up in mass, if necessary, on tho subdivisiou neirest to the obataelo. Distances will afterwards naturally be ivciivered an each subdivision sliall sucoossively have passed tho obstacle. Neverlheloss, if the difflonliy bo too t;rernl-in-chicf will always leave an aid-de-camp with its rear to bring him prompt information if it find a difficulty in folowing. 225. Subdivisions ought always to step .out well in obhqninir, both in broaking and forming (kimpanics or platoons. When either is done in succession, it is highly iinportatit that no subdivision slacken or shorten the step whilst tliat which precedes it is engaged iu tlie movenioiit. The observance of this principle can aloue prevent au elongation of the column. 220. If the battalion, marching by Hank, encounter a pass 80 narrow as to oblige it to defile with a f. out of rwo men, the colonel will ordT support arms, take the c;idonced step, and undouble the files, which will be exo- o\ited as prescribed in the school of tho company, No. ;!2() ; tho tiles will double again aa soon' as the breadth of the way will permit. 227. If the d.filc be only sufficient to receive a front of one man. tho colonel will cause the ni^n to pass one at a fimn. The men of the same file should follow each other in their order as closely as possiLlo, and without loss of finio. Aa sood as tha defile permits a trout of two or four men, th^ battalion will be re-formed into two or four rnnks, and v.-ill march in this order until there bo spaco l<3 form platoons or sections, as indicated Ko. 200. 2-"^. In both cas<>g, just supposed, tho head of tlio bat- tnliou, after having passed the defile, will march till ■ •'Hcient spaco be left to contain tho wholo of the snb- !■ visions in niass ; afterwards it will bo put in march by ilia means indicated No. 222. 229. When a command haa to move rapidly over a given distance, the movements prefcribcd In this article will bo executed iu double quick time; if the dintanco be b)iig,tlio chief of tlie column will not allow themal-ch at this gait to be continued for more than fifteen mtnntpn; at tho end of this time, ho will order the ordinary rotit* ■stop to bo marched for five minutes, and then araia resume tho double (juick. If the ground be nn*Vi.-n, linviilg considerable ascents and descents, ho will reserve I bo double quick for those p.irts of the ground most favor- able to this march. 230. A column marcUing alteru»tely' iu ao;(iblo'ii'nick ;. aiul the ordinary routo step, iu tup mub'uer slalej, ca:i easily accomplish yaiy long distances in a very stkort Npnco of time; but when the distance. to bu jjassel over ]<» not piealer than two miles, it ought to bu accomplish- oi), when tho ^rouud is favorable, without chapgiug the rate of march. Article Xuiuit. 2'y chamje dircclion in column at/nil iiisUiW'\ 231. The colTunn boing in march in the cadenced step, when the colonel glial! wish to cause it to cliauge dine- tion, he ■will go to rbe point at which the change ought to be commenced, and establish a marker there, presenting the breast to the Hank of the column ; this marker, no matter to which side the change of direction istoi^e n^ade, will Ije posted on the opposite side, and he will re- main in that position till the list subdivision of the b bo obEcrved ; be- cause, a fault that would be but sliglit iu a column of a single battalion, would cause uiuchembarrassmeBt in one of great depth. Article I'oubtu. To Iialt the ciiUonn. 2.3,1, The column being iu march, when the colonel sli.iU wish to halt it, he will command : 1. (Joluinn. Halt. 21'i. At the second command, briskly repeated by tho rnptains, tho column will halt ; no gniilo will stir, though ho may liavo I at his distance, or bo out of the direction of tho preceding guides. 211. Thccoliiuiii being in march, iu double quick time, will be halted by the same command. At the command 52 SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION— PART III. /ii//, Ibv iiK'u will hull in tboir placM, bdiI will them- nclvt'H rtKiiify their (HjaitiuDS in the ranliB. 'H'l. Tb" ci lumn lH>ing baited, when fbe colonel Hball with to form it into line little ill front of the Iratling ((■>>('''• 'od fncn to him ; tli'B iniide Kud the l.illowinK one will llx their ey' h on the colonel, in order promptly to conform themsflvt'H to bin dircctioua. 'IVi. If th«i colonel jud(;e it not n«-ocmiHry to (rive a gen- '■ra' dirpi-tion to the ^iiidec, be will limit himittif t<^ recti- lyigK th<- poHitiiin of giich as iim.v l>e without, or within thx direction, by the c'>mnianil piii'i^c o/ (lucli) compauii. or jinV/.i o/"(»nch) r..nt/xii»'«x-/.> Ih'. ri'jiit (or /o th' left ;) Ht this •-ommnnd, the guidea deaiKuat^xl will plicc them- neU'OH on the direction ; the others will Mtand fniit. 244. If. on the cutritry, the colonel judge it neci-soary to ^ive H K^niTil direction to the itiiides of the column, he will p'aoH the tlrst two on the direction he sliiill have cboaeBi and command : / , (Viu'ito, cover. 2t.'>. At thi". the following );uilac« themselvea on the direction covering the first two m file, I'Dd each precisely at a distance equal to the front of his company, from the niiido immediHtely preceding; the lientu' ant lolonel will assure llieiii in the direction, and thy coloMi-l willcommaiid : Left (or rt-y/i/)— I)BE8K. 240. At this command, each coiiii>any will incline to the right or loft, iiud dress forward or backward, bo us to bring; the du8i^'nated flank to rest on its guide ; each cap- tain will place biniMclf two paces eutside of his guide, promptly align bis comp.any purallelly with that which precedes, then command Fkunt, and return to his place in column. 247. Finally, if the general guides march on th't Hank of the coluiiii, the colonel, having balled it. will p'ace liiniself in rear of the color-bearer, to ascertain whether the leading general guide and the co'or-bcarer he exactly on the direction of tho two points in advanco, and t'stalilish them ou that direction if they be not already on it; the m»JL)r will do the like, iu respect to the general guide in ibu rear ; which being execute). This will li« executed as prescribed, No. 24i;. Iti.iiiurla. 251. The means indicated, No. 244, and following, for civin^ a general direction to the guides of a column, at lull distance, will apply only to a column composed of two, or, at most, three battalioiiH. If the number be more uumfrouH, its chief will caune the colors and general guides of all the battalions to stop out and place them- selves on tho direction which be may wish to give to the col'.mn, as is explained in the evolutions of the line. AiiTiCLE Fifth. Til close tlie column to hulf (UntaiKii, or in wnsn, 2 2. A column by company being at full distance right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to alose to half distance, on the leading company, he will command : 1. To half Hiflnnrc, clone eoliimti. 2. M&BCii (or .Miiilr •/Hicil— Mabcb). 2-Vt. At the first command, the captain of the l«ading company will cnulion it to Ntand fact. 2.'>4. At the command nian/i, which will be repeated by all the captiiin*, except the captain ol the lead' ng company, tliia company will stand fast, and its chief will align it by the left ; the file closers will rlofe one pace uptin the rear rank. 2V'i. All tho other companies will coutlnno to march, and as ea
  • 7. No partif ular attention need l>o given to the gen- eral direction r.f the guides l«forethoy respectively halt ; it will Hufllce if each follow iu the trace of the one who precedes him. , 258. The c 'lonel, on the side of tho guides, will super- intend the execution of the mevenient, observing that the captains halt their companies exactly at platoon distance the one from the other. 2J0. The lieutenant-colonel, a IVw paces in front, will fac« to the leading guide and assure tlie positions of tbo followimr guides as they successively place themselves ou the direction. 200. The mnjor will lollow the movement abreast with the last guide. 2til. If the column be in march, the colonel will cause it to close by the same commands. 2i:2. If the column be marching in double (|uick time, at the first command, the captain of theleadiag company will command quirl: lime ; the chiefs of the other com- panies will caution them to continue their march. 203. At the command march, the leading company will march in quick, and the other companies in double quick time; and as each arrives at platoon distance from tho preceding one, its chief will cause it to march in quick time. 2('>4. When tho rearmost company shall havo gained its distance, the colonel will command : Double quick— tilhRCU. 2li5. When the colonel shall wish to halt the column and to cause it to cbHO to half distance at the same time, he will notify the captain of the leading company ol his intention, who at tho command march will halt bis com- pany and align it by the loft. 2fi<>. If the column bo marching in quick time, and tbo colonel should not give the commanil doulde quick, the captain of tho leading company will halt his company at tbo command marcit, and align It by the left. In the case, where the colonel adds the command double quiat flank. 290. A column by division, closed in mass, right in front, having to change direction to the right, the colonel, after having caused a marker to be placed at the point where the change ought to commence, will command : 1. Battalion, right ivheel. 2. March. 291. At the command march, the leading division will wheel as if it were part of a column at half dis- tance. 292. The instant that this division commences the wheel, all the others will, at once, conform themselves to its movement ; to this end the left guide of each, advanc- ing slightly the left shoulder, and lengthening a littlo the step, will incliue to the left, and will observe, at the same time, to gain so much ground to the front that there may constantly be an interval of four paces between his divis- ion and that which precedes it ; and as soon as he shall cover the preceding guide, ho will cease to incline and then march exactly in his trace. 203. Each division will conform itself to the movement of its guide ; the men will feel lightly the elbow towards him and advance a little the lefc shoulder the instant the movement ccnimences ; each file, in inclining, will gain so much the less ground to the front, as the file shall be nearer to the pivot, and the right guide will gain only so much as may be necessary to maintain between his own and the preceding division the same distance which sepa- rates their marching flanks. 294. Each chief of division, turning to it, will regulate its niiirch, and see that it remains con-itantly included between its guides, that its alignment continues nearly parallel to that of the preceding divieion, and that tha center bonds only a little to the rear. 205. The colonel will superintend the movement, and cause the pivot of the leading division to lengthen or to shorten the step, conforming to th« principle established, SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PAKT 111. (^c^ool ufllif company, No. 2-7— if t-itlicr Lc necussary U« liu'ilitato tho uiorcmept xftlio citlicr divisioDii. 'J96. Ibf* lieutenant coU'DpI, placpJ noar tlif left giiitle of the leiding dirisioD, will rcculHtd his march, and take* ( HFP, uboTB all, that ho docs not tbruw hinutvir toi7/tiii the arc: be onsht to dMcrilx). ;i'J7. 1 hn mnjor, plawd in the n ar of thi- s'liU^. « ill K>'<' that the I IS t three conform t hems- 1-.' -. <:i. li l.y «li^:lii dittrees, t. the movement o( the «"''''■ iniiin liiiili Iv iri'- cedinjc, an nnicli iu the emli t- Tor l'> c iver too iimniptlv the gui'le iu his front : lip will rertil'yany HvriouH fault tliit may bo committed in either of thoHP particulars. 298. The colonel, seeing the whcol nearly ecdc-d, will command : I. /'•.rirnn/. 2. JlABClI. 290. At the second command, which will Ixs cir^n at the inotant the lea'ling division complotes its wheel, it will resume the direct march; the other ed. And by inverse means. 302. When the battalion shall have resnmed the direct march, the colonel will change the guide to the left, on weing the last throe guides nearly in the direction of the (•no in front. :'.ii:i. The foregoing chiingos ol direction will lieoxfotited Ill-cording to the same principles in a column, left in front. Mi. A column by company, closed in mass. %TiII chanire ilirection in marching, by the commands and mear.s in- dicated for a column by division. ^)5. The guide who is the pivot of the part'cnlnr wheel, ought to maintain hImBelf at hi* usual distance of six )i*c*8from the guide who precf'de< him; if this distance l)e Hot exactly preoerved, the divisions would peoessarlly become confounded, which must bo carefnlly avoided. 2J. To cliawje (lirccHdiifiom a hall, .'WC. A column by company, or by division, cluHod in mass, being at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to give il a new direction, and iu which it is to remain, ho will crtuse it to execute this movement by the flanks of sub- divisions, in the following manner : 307. The battalion having the right in front, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction by Iho ri^'ht flank, he will indicate to the lieutenuit colonel the point of direction ti the right ; this officer will imnie- illately ostablish, on the new direction, two markern, dis- t.'intfrom each other a little less than the front of the (irst subdivision, the first marker in front of tho riglit fll« of this subdivision ; which being extcutot', he will com-, mand : 1. Cliange direction by the right flanl;. 2. BaUalion, right — Face. 3. JiABcuXor ci«((6/c fyia'cA— Mahcu.) 308. At the second command, the colnmn will fiico to tlio riglit, and each chief of subdivi.sion will placo himsblf by the side of his right guide. ".09. At the command march, all the subdivisions will step off together : tlio right guide of tlii lending one will direct himself to the flrst step, parallelly t" tlie markers )daced In advance on the now direction ; the chief of tho Bubdirisiou will not follow tho movement, but sue it flio giast, and as soon as tho left guide shall bnvo passed, he will command : 1. First coiti^auij {or first (Uiision.) 2. Halt. 4. 1^— Darss. ri:o.M. oil). At th« fourth coiiiinand, the aiibdivitiuu will plaaridlelly to that sub- ilivis on, and at the distance of four (iices from Us reiii' latlk. ^.1-. Each chief (^ftub'liviiii'.n wi'l hall iu his own per- son, on urrivicg opposite- to tho lell tuides already placed on the new direction, roe his subdivision lilu past, and confirm bimfcif, in baiting and aligning it, to what is prescribed No. '.Ui'J. 313. If the clianL,'.' of direcfion U- h*<'i" hfl flank, the colonel will cniise markers to bo estamiBhod as before, the first in front of the l>tt lllo of tho lcadiiii;HubdiviHii'n,aud tlieugivc the same C(.>iiiiiiaudB,substiuitingthe iudicutiuu Ic/l for rl^iht. 314. AiiheB(:cond comnmnd, all the subdivisions will face to the left, and each chief will place biiusulf by tho side of his lolt guide. 315. At thn command i/Kir'/i, h'I the suhdiviaionR will step ofl together, each conducted by its chief. 3IU. The guide of the leading siibdivisiou will direct himself, from the first step, parallelly to tho markers; the subdivision will be conducted by its chief; and as soon as its lott guide shall have pa-wed the second marker, it will be halted and aligned as prescribed above ; end bo of each of the lollowinc; subdivision*. 317. The colonel will hold himself on the designated flank, to ceo that each new subdiviijion outers the new di- rection parallelly to tho lending one, and at the prescribed distance from that which jlreoedes. 318. The lieutenant colonel will place himseU in front of, and facing to, the guide of the leading subdivision, and will assure the positions of the following guides, as tliev successively arrive on the new direction. 319. Tho major will follow the movement abreast with the last cubdiviiioii. 320. In order that lliis luovemfnt may beexectited with facility and precision, it is necessary that the leading subdivision sliould entirely unmask tlio column : for ex- ample, tho movement boiiia: made by the right flank, it is necessary, before haltiiic tho leading suhdivls'on. that its left guide Khali, at least have arrived at tho place previ- ously occupied by its riglit guide, in order that each fel- lowing subdivision which has to pass over a space at least C(|ual to its front to putitKoKin the new direction, and whose left ought to pass tho point at which the riaht had rested, may, at the command h>ill. lind itself, in its whole front, parallel to the leading Hubdivi'-ion. 3'_'1. By this method there is no direction that uniy not bo given to a column in masn. AUTK LU Xl.M'U. Bcinrj in colfonu al hilf (Unlnnca, or closed iit^tnasti to lake tli.-Jancrs. 322. A column at half distaixo will take fHll diatHiices ,, hi/ tho head of tho column whoa it has to prolong itself j on the line of battle. If, on thi> contrary, it has to form , itself into lino of batlle on the ground it occupies, i( wil^,, tfiko diBtancos on tho leading or oi» thu rearmost subdi- • vision according as the one or other may find itself at the point where the ri-ht or left of tho ballalion i>n;:ht (o rest iii lino of battle. l$t. To lake ditianccs hij the licad oj the column. 323. The column being by company at half diatanco and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to t.ike lull distances by tho head, he will command : }lil llie Jiead of voUtmii, lukc wheeling duiUiuc. 3-1. At this command, tho captain of tho loading loin- pauy will put it in murcb ; to thiu ond| be will cuni- muud: , i . SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 1. First company, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. Mabch (or ] dmthle gm'cfe— Maucu.) ;;25. When tlio second eliiU have nearly its wheeling | distaoce, its cuptaia will commaud: i 1. S'poii'l compntiti, foniHxrd. 2. Gnida I'fi. 3. Mabcb. 1 (or douhh giii'ct— March).' ! 32(i. At tlio rominand march, which will l)e proHonnced at the iuatuut that thia company shall have iis wheelint; distan(^p, it will stnp olV smartly, tiikinc the step from Iho precediug company. Knch of tlio other compinu'S will succoseively oxocuto what has just been proscribed for the Bf'cond. 027. The colonol will SCO that each company puts itself in march at tho instant it has its distance. o2S. Tho lioutouaiit-colonid r doiihlc giiic/;— March). :!31. If the column bj marching in quick time, at the notnmand morch: the captain of tho leai^ng company will cause doiihli- quick tii,ic to be taken ; which will also be done by tho othor ca])taina as the companies successively attain their proper wheuling distance. !il^'2. If the column bo marching in donhJe quich timo, the loadinj; company will continue to m'trch at tiie samo gnit. Tho captains of the other companies will cause quick time to bo taken, and as each company gains its proper dis- tance, its captain will cause it to retake the douhle quick 2fJ. To fake distancci! on the roir of the cnhniDi. S.13. If tho colonel wish to take distanoes on the rear" most com) any, he will ostabli-h two markers on the di' rection he shall wish to give to the line of battle, the flrs' opposite to thB rearmoHt com; any, tho second marker to" wards the head of tho colnmn, at company distance from the first, aii taia will holt, and align it on this marker, in tho manner prescribed lor tho eighth company. 337, When th i captain of tho sixth oimpnny shall see that there is, between his company and (ho seventh, the necessary space for wheeling into line, he will halt his company; the guile facing to the rear will place himself promptly on the direction, and tho moment he shall be assured in his position, the captain will align the com- pany by the left, and then place himself two paces before its centre.; tho othor companies will successively conform tbemselvo to what has jiist been proscribed for the sixth company. 838. The colonel will follow the movement, and see that each company halts at tho pre-cribed distance ; he will promptly remedy any fault that may be committed, and, us sci >u as all the companies shall be aligned, ho will cause tho guides, who aro faced to the rear, to fai'o about. 3.39. The lieutenant colonel will successively assure the left guides on the direction, placing himself in their roar, as they arrive. 340."The major will hold himself at the head of the column, ami will direct the march of the leading guide. 3(/. To take distances at the head qf the colnmn. 341. Tho colc'el, wishing to take distances on the lead- ing company, will establish two markers in the manner just proBcribed, one abreast with this company, and the other at company distance in rear of the tir.st, but both facing to the front : the left general guide, on an intima- tion from tho lieutenant colouol, will moTO rapidly to the rear and place himself correctly on tho prolongation of the two markers, a little beyond the point to which tho rear of the column will extend: these dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 1. On the first company, take wheeling disianca. 2. liatlnl- ion. about— Yace.- 3. Colnmn, forward. 4. Guide right. 5, March ( r double quick — March). 342. At the second cohimand, all tho companies, except the one designated, will face about, the guides remaining in the front rank, now become the rear. 343. At the fourth command, tho captains will place themselves outside of their guides. 344. At the command march, the captain of the designated company, will align it, as prescribed, No. 335, on the mar- ker placed by its side. 34.5. The remaining companies will put themselves in march, the'guide of the rearmost one will direct himself a little within the left general guide ; when the second company ehall have arrived opposite the second marker, its captain will face it about, conforming to what is pro- scribed. No. 270, and align it, as has just been prescribec1oiu«din mBSX, ttiP ronntermarrh will be exocaie1. At tbo first coniiuinil, tlir- cliicrd (if tbe odd niiiii- bered divisiuoB will camion tliein to face to tlio ricbt, aod lliu eveu to llii> lift ; the ri|{ht and left guides of all tbe diviBlouH will f.ice about ; thecliiefH of the odd divi- HioDB will Imsteii to the right and ciiuoe two fi|i'9 to brciik to tbe rear, and each chiof place himgelf on tbe lelt of iho leading front rank man of jiis divinion ; the chiefn of even dtrinions will hasten to their left, and cnuHe two filcH to break to the rear, and each chief place himself uu tbo right of his leading front rank man. 35C. At the command manh, all the diriiiionf*, each conduct! d by it< chief, will Htep olT smartly, the guides standing fast; each odd dirisioH will wheel by file to tbo lifft around its right guide; each e%-on diviHiou will wheel ty file to the right urouu 1 its left guide, each division so directing its march as to arrive behind itn opposite guide, and when its bead Fliall bo up with this guide, the chief shall halt the division, and cause it to face to the front. 357. Each division, on f-iciug to the front, will bo aligned by it.'^ chief by the right ; to this end, tbe chiefs of the even diviKions will move rapidly to tbe right of tl eir resp.'Ctive divisions. u6S. The divisions being aligned, each chief will com- mand, Fbont ; at this, the guides will shift to their proper flanks. 35'J. In a column with the left in front, the counter- march will be executed by the same commands and utoanH ; but all the divisions will be aligned bv the left: to thii end, the chiefs of the odd divisions will hasten to the left of their rsspectivo divisions us soon us the latter thall have been faced to the front. 3U'J- Tlie colonel, placed ou the directing flank, will superintend the general movement. 361. The countermarch being ended, tbo lientonant colonel will always phice hiinselfubreast with the loading, and the major ubrea.st with the rturmost division. 3'"i2. In a column by company, clwed in mass, the countermarch will bo executed by the name means and commands, applying to companies what is prcscrit)ed for divi^ous. 3G3. The countermarch will always take place from a halt, whether the column bo cioHitd in maHj, or at full, or half dist»uc4^^. AaTICLE Eletimu. T!eiii(i ill column hy company, closed in man/i, to foi-m iliviuions, 'Mil. The column being closed in mass, right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form divi- sions, ho will command : 1. Form divinioiu. 2. LrflcompaiueM,Un—¥Avr.. .">. MAKCa (or double giucA— Maucu). 3G5. At the first command, the captains of llie left com- panies will caution them to face to the left. 3t;C. At the second comnmnd, tho left companiei will face to tho left, and their captains will jilace themselves ly the side of their respective left guidm. ;;(i7. The ri^lit companies, and tbelrcaptuins. will stand fast; but the right and left guides of eiicn of these com- panies, will place themwelvea resixsctively before tbe right and left tiles of the company, both guides facing to tbe right, and each resting his right arm gently nguinst the breast of the Irotlt rank man of tlio file, in order to mark tlio direction. 3('>S. At tbo command tibirr/t, tho loft companies only will put thrmwlves in march, their raptains ptauding fast: as each shall see that his company, filing past, ban nearly cleared tbo rulamn, he will command : 1. Nmc/i fowixiiiy. Halt. 3. Kbont. 300. The first command will l>e given when the company shall yet have four paces to march ; the sicond at the instant it shall have cleared Its right company; aud tbe third immediately uftiT the second. 370. The company having fared to th > front, the files, if there bo intervuls between them, will promptly incline to the right ; the captain will place himself on tho left of tho right company of the division, and align himself cor- rectly on tlio front tank of that company. .'171. Tho Icf. guide 'will place bimnelf at tho same time before one of the tliree lift flies of his company, face to the right, and cover correctly tbe ;:uides of the right company; the moment the captain sees him estab- lished ou the direction, he will command : lii'jhl—'DB.T.SS. 372. At ibis, the left company will dress forwanl on tho alignmvnt of the right cumpany ; tbo front rank man, who may flnil himaelf opposite to the left guide, will, without preceding his rank, rest lightly his breast against the right arm of this guide ; the captain of tbe left company will direct its alignment on thin man, and tbe alignment being assured, he will command, Kbont ; but not quit his position. 373. Tho C'lonel seeing the divisions formed, will com- mand : (Tuidcs— Posts. 874. At this, the guides who have marked the fronts of divisions will return to their places in columnu,the left guide of each right company pai-slng thruiiKh'tnft inter- val in tbe centre of the division, and the captains will plHCo themselves as pros ribed No. 1'k 375. The colonel from tbe directing flank of tho col- umn, will superintend ti.e general execution of the movement. 370. If the column be in march, instead of at a halt, when tho colonel shall wish to form divisions, he will commaTid : 1. Form duisioiis. 2. Lffl companies, b;/ the left flank. 3. Maucii (or double i^uict— MAttCH). 377. At fhn first command, tho captains of the right companies will commaud, JUurl: time, tho captains of the left companies will caution their companies to /me by Iht Up. flank. 378. At the third command, Ibo right corapsnios will mark time, the h'fl companies will face to the left; tho captains of the left companies will each see his company file pist him, aud wliou it has cleared tho column, will command : ^ii<7( coiiipanii by the rejW yJajii— Mahch. As soon 08 tho divisions arc formed, the colonel will c iiimarid : 4. Fortcatd. 5. March. 379. At tho fifth command, the column will resnrao the gait at which it was marching previous to the commence- ment of the movement. The guides of each division will remain ou tlio right and left of their respective compa- nies; tho lelt guide of the right company will pass into the line of file closers, before the two companies are united , tho right guide of tbo left company will step Into tho rear rank. The captains will place themselves as prescribed No. To. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PAKT IV. 51 330.. If the column be at a halt, and closed in mass, in- stead of at fuller half distance, divisions will be formed in the same manner ; but the captains of the left companies, it the movement be made in quick time, after command- ing Front, will each place himself before Ihe centre of his company, and command, 1. Hitch compau;/, forward. 2. Guide riijht. 3. Maech. If the movement be made In double quick time, each will command as soon as his compauy has cleared the column : 1. Such companij hi/ the right flank. 2, Mabcii. 381. The right guide of each left company will so direct his march as to arrive by the side of the mnn on the left of the right company. The left company being nearly up with the rear rank of the right company, its captain will halt it. and the movement will be finished us prescribed No. 371 and following. 382. If the left be in front, the movement will be exe- cuted by inverse means : the right companies will conform themselves to what is prescribed above for the left compa- nies ; and the t>vo guides, placed respectively, before the right and left files ot each left company, will face to the left. At the command, Oi/u/*-* poj/.«, given by the colo- nel, the guides who have marked the front of divisions, and the captains, will quickly retake their places in the column. 383. If the column be marching at full distance, the divisions will be formed as prescribed No. 190. If it be marching' at half distance, the formation will take place by the comiiuinds and according to the principles indica- I'd No. 37-'. i/l'tllU in ichi'-h the compani,' are ali^jwd hy Iho Wfl. 401. A column by division may form itgolf into lino sf battle by tho B»me commitnda, and minuR, but obgerrinp wliit follows: if tho richt b<< in front, .it the conimnml Antt, (fiven by the chiefs of division, lli • lift uuide of ench right company will place himself on the nliKtimont opjx)- iiit« to on> of the tliroo; fiU« on the loft of lila compa- ny ; the left piiide of the firnt company will hfs a88tir<-d on the direction by tho lletitenant colonel ; tdo !■ ft puideB of the other right companies will alifn theinwlveH correctly on the division Kuides ; to this oiid, tho division gnldes (on the alignment) will invert, and hold thiir pieces ni« p«rpeodicularly before tho centre of their bodiwH, at tho command /. ft into line. uhol. If tho colnmn by dirtpi.ni be with tho'left in front, the right guides of left compnnins will conform themselves to what has juat bnen prMcril)->d fwr the I'/ft guides of right companies, and place them- selves on the line opposite to one of the tliryo right Hies of their rispt'ctive companies. 402. A csluinn in march will be formed info llne,witli- tly rectify theirpositioiis. 4'j;i. If, in forming the column into line, tbo colom! should wish to move forward, without lialting, ho will command : 1. li]/ companies, IJl wheeJ.^ 2. Mabcii (or douUe quick— MA.BC1I). , 404. At the command iinrc/i. bristly repeated by fhn captains, each cfimi>Hny will whifl to th" left on a fixed pivot, as prescribed iu the srhofil of the company Ko. 2f;l ; the left guides will stop back into tlio r;tnk of lilo closers before tho wheel is complotcd, and when tho right of the a.mpaniea shall arri\o near tho line, iho colonel will command : 3. Furtcard. 4. Uaucii. 0. GiMc centre. 4(]0. At tho fourth r.omninnd, given at thu instant tho wheel is couipl tttil, tho ci nipauies will march dir-ctly to tho front. At the liUh eoniuiHnd, the cidor and tho i;on- eral guides will move rapiilly six paces to tho front. Tho colonel will asHure the direction of the color ; the cap- tains of companies and tho moii will, at once, oonform themselves to tho pn'ociides of tho march in line of »)af Ir, to l>e hereinafter indicated, No. 687 aii'l th ) lollow- Ing. 40f,. Tr.e same principles aro appVicablo to a column loft in front '■ . ' By inversion lo tint rigU {or U^ iido line o/ halllc. , 407. When a roluiiin, right in front, shall be under th* iietesHity of forming iisolf into lino faced to tho reverse llauk, and the colonel shall wish to oxecut«i 'his fora;a- tion by the shortest movcmout, ho will command : 1. lij iavtrsion, riylU into line, ivJicd, I.TldtlnIln f/ui'k riijIU. ,, I 408 At the first command, tho llouteiiailt colonH wii^ placrt'liinK-olf in front, and facing to the rlgtlt piilde of the leading su'id vihlon ; at tho nncond cornmrtntf, ho'will r-ctify, as promptly a4 possil le, llio din^ctSon of tho right guides of the column ; th" captain fif tho old ciinipany, if there bu one, and t'p coltiiuu be by division, will promptly bring tho rlglit of his company ou'the direo- tiou, and at company distance from I lie division next in front: the left guide of the leadinj: H^l.-iivi.^ioti will place himself ou the direction of tho right ;;nidfs, and will I* assured in his position by tho licul. imut, .1 , ,! t v.Mrl. being executed, tho coleael will comman ' 3. JI\RCH (or double quid— 'hi A i. ■■). 409. At this, the front rank man of each anbdiviJioi: will face to the right, rest his breast lightly against tho left 1" • n will form itself to tho I I.: to tho principles prr. »■ _ -^1 tho colonel will coin- niuud : (7iiWc«— PcFTS. 410. Tf tho column Ih> with the loft iu front, it will form Itself, by Inversion, to the lett into line, according to the sanio principleg. 411. Ifthecolond shouUl wiiih file battalion, when formed into line of battle, to bo moved forward, tho move- ment will be execute' formations where the several sub- divisions of a column arrive one after another on tho line of battle ; such aro formations on tlio right, or loft, for- ward and ficed to the rear into line of biitt'o, as well as deployments of ccdnmns in mass. 413. The successive f.jrmatiou8 which may bo ordered « when the column is marching, and is to continue march- ing, will he executed by a coinbinrit!"ii ti/, or reat. f«r the right, ns will as the point of direction to tho left; the lieutenant colonel will hastou with two markers, and extalilish them in the following manner on tho direction indicated. 415. The lirst marker will be phiced at tho point of n))jmi for the right front rank man of the hndingconnpany ; tho second will indicate tho point where one of tho three left files of the Bane' C(,nipaiiy will rest when inline ; they will bo placed so us to proseut the right shouldsr to the battalion when formed. •lie. Thcso dispositions being umde, the coloiu-1 will cuiuniaud : 1. On the ri'jUl, iiUv line. 2. Hatltiliou, gtiUlt ridld. 417. At tho second couimainl, the right will Vecomc the directing flank, and the touoli of tlio elbow will be to that side; the right guide of the leai'jng company will march straight forward until up with the turning point, and each following guide will ;aurch In tho trace of tho one im- mediately pieceilii;g. 418. Tho leading company being nearly up with tho first marker, its capUiin will ;< uiniiiain! : 1. Iliijhl turn, and when tho company is pncisoly up with this markur, he will add : 2. J^Uncii. 410 At the command ntarc7(, tho company will turn to the rif;ht ; the right guide will so direct himself as to brine the man n"xt to him opposite to the right marker, and when at throe puces from him, tho captain will com- mand : 1. First company; 2. Halt. 42 >. At the second command, tho comiiany will halt; the file", not yet inline, will form promptly ; t'>e left guide wi 1 retire as a fileclosar ; and tho captain will then command : 3. Jfi(/7(1— DBP.3F. 421. At this command, tho company will align itself; ill J two men who find themselves opposite to Iho twomar- 1-. rs, willesoh lightly rest his breast iigainst the right :irni of his in«rker; tho captaia, passing to tho right of tho front rank, will dkeot the nligninent of thcfe two men. These ruUt are gcnvral for all succcmive forma- tions. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 59 422. The socond company will contiune to mnrch i HtraigUt forward : when arriyed opposite to tlip left flank i of tho procciliug company, it will turn to the riitht, and 1*0 formed on the line of buttle, as has j':Bt l>c-fn pro- j scribed; the right guide will direct liiniseli bo hs to come i upon that line by the side of the man on the 1. fc of the I liret compiny. | 423. At tlio distance of thrpo pacos from the line of , battle, the company will be halted by its captain, who will place himself briskly by (lie side of the nitn on the | l"ft of the preceding company, and align himself correctly on its front rank. | 424. The left guide will, at tbo snrac time, place himself before one of the three left filo< oi his companjrv and, facing to the right, ho will p'aco himself accurately on the direction of the two markers of tlio procoding company. 125. Tlio captain will tli'jn comwond : night— Danaa. 4..'G. At thiscommand, the second company will dress forward on th-* line ; the c.iptain will direct its alignment on the front rank iiian who his rested his breast ag iin.st the lott ;ruide of the company. 427. Tlio following companies will th'js come successive- iy t" fiiriii lliomselves on thu line of battle, each confjrni- iii;: il.selt 10 what has just been prescribed fortlieono next to the right; and when they sljall all bo catablistaed, the colonel will command: GuiJta— Posts, 428. At this comtnand, the guides will take their places in the lino of battl"!, and the marhcrs placed before the right company will retire. 429. If tile c dumn be marching in inick tinic, and the rolouol should wish to cause the movement to bo executed in dnuMe quick time, he will add the command: Dmibh tjiiich—J^AHni. At the command marcli. all tho- co'iipa- nie« will take (ho double quick step, and tho movemont will boexocut' d as prescribed, No. 417, and following. 4oO. Tho culoatl will follow up the formatioi!, pi^s- %iiig along tho front, and fcoing alwajs oppo.-iite to tho lompany about to turn: it is thus that ho will bo tho bettor able to see and to correct tho error that would re- sult from a command given too so?n or too late to the precodine company. iZ\. The li'iufonant colonel will, with fho greatest care, assure the direction of the guides ; to this end, the instant that tho markers are established for fho leading company, ho will move a little beyond the point at which tho left of tho next company will rest, establish himself correctly on t"o prolongation of the two markers, and assure tho guide of tho second company on this di- rection; this guide, bein? ansnred, tho liontenaut colonel will placo himself farther to tho rear, in order to assure, in like manner, the guide of the third company, and so on, successivelj'. to the left of the battalion. In assuring iho gin'des in their positions on the line of battle, he will tako care to let them first pii«co themselves, and confine himself to rectify their positions if they do not cover accurately, and at the proper distance, the prece- ding (fnides or markers. This rule is general, for all sue- ccuive fonnalinns. 4.'}2. A column, left In front, will form itself en the left into line of battle, according to the same principles; the captains will go to the loft of their n'spcctive com- p mio* to align tliom, and shift afterwards to thoir proper flanks, as prescribed No. 400. Jkmarkt on tlie fonnation on the right, or I. ft, into lint o/ UMc. 4'33. In order that thi? movement may bo executed with regularity. It is nccresary t<> establish the line of battle so that the guide of each company, after turning, may have at least ten steps to take, in order to come upnn that lino. 4''). In tho first exorcises, (ho lino of batlV' w ill bo es'ablit^hod on a direction parallel to that of the column ; but, when tho captains and guides shall comprehend tho mechanism of tho movsmcnt, tho colonel will .generally choose oblique directions, in order to habilnate the bat- taliou to form itself in any direction. 4'!,"). When thedirtction of the line of battle forms a sensible angle with tliat of the march of the coluuin. tho colonel, before beginning tho movement, will give the head of tlie.column a new direction pirallol to (hat line; to this end, be will indicate to the guide of the bading company a po'nt in advance, on which tfus guide will ini- i:iediately direct himself, and the company will conform itself to tho direction of its guide, at the command, or un a mero caution, of the captain, according as the change of direction may require ; each following company will make tho same movement, on the same ground, as it shall suc- cessively arriva. ]!y thi» means the guides of all the ci'mpanies iu the column will have, after turning, n(arly the same nnmboi of paces to tako in order to come upon the lino of battle. 4"i;. Every captain will alwa^ s observe, in placing him- self on that line, not to give the command dress, until af- tr the guide of his company shall have been assured ou the diroetion by tho lieutenant colonel. Tltii rule it gene- ral fur all successive formation-t. 4:-7. Each captain will cause his eompary to tupport aruis, t'le iastaut that the captain, who follows him. sha'l have commanded //on<. This rule is general for all sue- cestlve formations. iS>i. AVh>n, iu tho esortition of this movemotit, tho colonel shall wish to commence firing, he will give the ' rder tc that effect to the captain whose company is tho first in line of battle; this captain will immediately placo himself behind the centre of bis company, and as soon as thajiext company shall have commanded /)oh<, ho wi'l comm nee tho fire by filo, by the commnnds prescribed, fthoo! cf the, conipaiiv. At the roram:ind Jire hit file, the marker at tho outer filo of this first company will retire, .Tud tho other will place hiroaclf against the nearest man of the next company. The captain of the latter will com- mence firing as soon as the capt;iin of the third company, in line shall have commtcded front ; llie marker befi>re tho nearest filo of tho sicoud company, in line, will now retire, and the guide before tho ot>posite flank will placo himself before tho nearest file of tho third company iu lino, atid so on, iu eoutiatititiou, to (he last company on the left or right of the battalion, according as the forma- tion may have commenc«d with tho r'ght or left in front. 439. In all the successive formations, the same princi- ples will be observed for the execution of the fire by file. This fire will always bo executed by thocommand of each captain of company. 3d,, Colmnu at full (listaHce,foricc nt tlir(>o \iaco% from that liue, tke captain Mill rommaud : 1. .<<-fo». At Iho 8Ccond coinmaDil, tlip company will halt; the fiU- not ypt in Hha with the guide will come into it promptly, llm l<-ft piido will placo himself fn the lino of (•attio, »•> an to Ik' oppoaite to one nf the tlirrK) files ou the left of the r iinpaiiy ; and, as eoon aa he in aHNurod on the direction by the lieutenant cj^donel, the rni^tain, havinx placed liliDdeU accnrately on the line of liattle, will com- niand : Jiight—1>RK9B. HC. At thn InNlnnt that the unido of Hm fecund com- pany bepins t.i turn to Ihe riicht, the piiide of the third, ceaslDR to follow the file immedintidy before him, will march Htraight forward ; and, when he shall arrive oppo- Bite to the left of the second, hiH cuptaiu will ciiuqe the company to turn to the right, in order to approach the line of battle, halt it at three paces from that line, and n'ign it by the right, aa proscrib d for the second com- pany. 447. Kach fidlowing company will execute what has just been prepcribed for the third, as the preceding com- pany nhall turn to the right, in order to ni)proach the linn of battle. H'. The formation ond^'i, tbo colonel will command : Cuulcx—VosTS 440 The colonel and lientenant-colonel will observe in this formation, what is prescribed for them on the right into line. 450. A column left in front, will form itself forward into line of battle according to the same principles and by inver"e meant. 461. When a column by company at full distance, right in front, and in march, fhall arrive behinearer and tho right general gHidc will move rapidly six paces in advance of the lino. The colonel will assure the direction of the rolor-bearer. Tho lieutenant colonel and the right companies will imme- diatoly conform themselves to the principles of Ihe march in line of battle. The left coinpaniea and the left general guide, as they arrive on the line, will also conform to the same principles. If the column be marching in double iiuick time, when the last rnnipany shall have arriveil on the line, tho colonel will cause the double quick to be resumed. 459. It Is not necessary that tho movement be entirely completed, before halting the battalion. As soon as tho part of the battalion already formed shall have arrived on the line of battle, the colonel will halt the battaliou ; the companies not in line will each complete the movement Iie regained in like manner. In eithor caco, tho next company will bo led into error, and the fault propagated to tho opposite flunk of the bat- talion. 4f>2. Tho guide of each company ought so to regulate hiiiuelf in turnieg, as to bring his company to the halt- ing point parallolly with the lino of battlo.i( •103. If the niiglo formed by tho lino of battle and tho primitive diroctiatXla. 47S. A column, left iu trout, will form itself faced to the rear into line of battle according to the same princi- pl-s and by inverse means. 479. If the oolnnin be in march, and should arrive iu fron' of the right of the lino on which it is lo form inio battle, the colonel and lieutenant colouul will conform to what is prescribed, Kos. 414 an^l 415. 480. Wlieu the head of the column shall bo nearly at company distance from the two maricrd establibhod on the Hue, the colonel will command : 61 1. Into Vine, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, bi/ the rigJiC"] flanJc. 3. Mabch (ordow&fe giact— MABcn). ' 4S1. At the first command, the captains will caution their companies to face by the right Qlink. 482. At the command march, briskly repeated by tho captains of c<;mranios, all tho companies will face lo the right ; the first company will then wbcel by file to the left, and bo directed by its captain.'a little to tho rear of the Uft marker ; then pass three paces beyond the line, and wheel again by file to the left ; having arrived on tho line, the captain will halt the company, and align it by the right. The remaining part of tho movement will 1 e exi eutod as hrretoforo explained. 483. Tho foregoing principles are applicable to a col- umn, left in front. 484. As the companies approach tho lino of battle, it is necessary that their captains should so direct the march as to cross that line a little iu roar of their respective guides, who are faced to tho basis of tho formation ; •hence each guide ought to detaoh himself in time to find himself correctly estiblished on tho direction before Lis company shall come up with him. ABTiciE Third. I'or motion in lino of battle by two movements. 485. If a column by company, right in front, anfl at a halt, find itself in part on tho lino of battle, and the colonel should think proper to form line of battle before all tho companies enter the now direction, the formaticn will be executed in tho following manner : 480. It will bo supposed timt the column has arrived behind tiro line of battle, and that fl\o companiea have entered the now direction. Tho colonel having assured the guides of the first five companies on the direction, will command : I, Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear conqiaaics, forward into line. 4S7. At the second command, tho chief of each of the rear companies will command : By company, left half wheel; and tho colonel will add : , 3. March (or double quick— 1S.K9.qv.). 488. At this command, briskly repeated, the first live companies will form themselves to the. left, into line of bat- tle, and the thren last, forward, into line of battle, by the means prescribed for these respective formations ; each captain of the three roar companies will, when his com-' pauy shall have sufficiently wheeled, command : 1. Forward. 2. Marcii. 3. Guide ri'jhl. 489. If the column bo iu march, llje colonel will can. mand : 1. To the left, and formird inlo line. '2. March (or double quick — March). 490. At the first command, the captains of those com- panies which have not entered on tho new direction, will command: Ihj company, Ufl half irh'jil. At the commaud march, briskly rcpeateil, the fiist five c:)mpanies will form left into line, and tho last three forward into line, as pre- siiribfd for these respective formations. Those captains who fjrm their companies forward into line will conform to what is proscribed, No. 4SS. 491. If tho colonel should wi.sh, in forming the battalion into lite, to march ii; immediately forward, hs will com- mand: 1. By company lo the hfl, and forward inlo line. 2. Maucu 492. At the first command, each captain, whose com- pany is not jet in the new direction, will command: 1. Jly company, Irft half wheel. 2. Pwble quick. At the (.'oinnibud march, briskly repeated by tho captains, tho companies not iu the new direction will execute what is prescribed above for forming forward into line while SCHOOL (J)F TUB BATTALION— PART IV. mHrthinp; pach or the otiior compaaicfi will whcvl to the loft on a fnfd piTot, and »hon the ri(;bt of tlifpo compa- nies Hball arrive ou tbo lino, tho colonel will command : 3. Forward. 4. Mabch. 6. GnicU centre. ^ 493. Tho fifth command will l.o pivcn wlion tho color- bearer arrives on the lino, if not alreHdv there. 494. If tho hattalion be marching in di)iiblo quick time, theculnnel will cause quiclc time to bo talieu b^foro com- mencinc the moTement. 495. If. instead of arriviuK behind, tho column shoald arrive bef ire tho lino of bittle, tlio colouol w ill command : 1. Le/l into line, irhctl. 2. Three rMr companies into line, faced to Uu rear. 496. At the second commanr^, the captain of each of tho Oiree rear cnmpaniea will command : 1. Such (yimpaiiy ; li. /fiy*/— Face. Tho colonel will then add : 3. MABcn (or double 7i/ict— Mabcb). 497. At this command, briskly repeated, tho first five companies will form themiselveB l'> the left, into line of battle, and the three last/act J to Vtc rear, into li/ieo/lnilttc, by the means prescribed for these rospoctivo formations. 498. If the column bo in march, the colonel will com- mand : 1. To tlic left, nnil into /i'm-' facal to the rear. S.MAItfc'I! (or double ral guide. Tho major, placed in rear of the left guide of the eighth company, will, as soon a^ tho guide of tho seTwiilh company is eslnblished on the direction, hasten in roar of tho guides of the other companies, so as to aseiire each of them in succcs-sion on tho line. 2(/. Column nt half di-slanre, nii the rirc'.scribed for a col- umn at full (listaiicc. 3(f. Column at half distance, forward, into line of battle. 508. If it ho wished to form a rnlTimn at lialfdistance, forward into line of battle, the colonol will first cause It to close in mass and then deploy it on tho leading c iiipany. Alh. Cohimn nt half distance, faced to the rcnr, into line of battle. r>09. A column at half distance will bo formed Into lino of battle, faced to tho rear, ns prcpcribcd (or a column at full distance. A uTicLK Fifth. Deployment of columns elated in mass. 510. A column in nuifs may be farmed into Ifne of battle : 1. Faced to tho front, by the deployment. 2. Faced to the tear, by the countermarch and tho deployment. .0. Faced to tlu' right and faced to tho loft, by a change of direction by the think, and tho doploymeut. CIl. When n column in ninsi, by division, arrives be- liind tho line on which It is inionded to deploy it, tho colonel will indicate, in advance, to tho lieutenant col . onel, the direction of the Hue of battle, as well us tho jioint on which ho may wish to direct tlie column. Tho lieutenant colonel will iiniucdiately detntch bimselfwitli two markers, and esfabliih them on that line, the first at the point indicated, tlm focoud a littlo less than tho Iront of tt divifcion fioin the liist. .')I2. Deployments will always bo giado upon lines par- allel, and linos |)erpcndicular to tho line of battle ; conse- quently, if the lieiid of tho cjlumu bo near the line of battle, the colonel will commence by establishing tho direct! m of tlio column perpendicularly to that line, if it be not already so, by one ol tho jmans indicited. No. 211 and following, or No. 307 and following-. If tho column bo in march, ho will 80 direct it that it may arrive exactly behind the markers, perpendicularly to tlio lino of battle, and halt it at throe paces from lliat line. CA'A. The column, right iu front, being halted, it is sup- posed that the colonol wishes to deploy it on the first di- vision ; ho will order the left general guide to go to n print on tho line of battle a little beyiuid that at which the left of tho battalion will rest when deployed, and place himself correctly on tho prolongatiOH of tfio mark- ors cBtablished bofuro tho first division. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— rAET IV. 63 614. Theee dispositions beiDg made, the colonel \rill command : 1. On the firsl dU-Uion, deploy column. 2. UaUalion, left —Face. 515. At tho first command, Ihecliiefef tlip first division will caution it to stand fast ; tho chiefs of tlio three other diTinioDS will remind thorn that they will hare to face to tho left. 510. At the second command, the tlireo lapt divisions will face to tho left ; tho chief of each division will place himself by the side of its left gaid", and the junior cap- tain by the side of tho covi-rinj; ierceant of the left com- pany, who will have stepped into the front rank. 517. At tho same commaml, the lientcniint colonel will place a third marker on tho alignment of the two first, opposite to one of the three left files (f tho right compa- ny, first division, and then place hiniscvf on ilio line of battle a few pnees beyond the point at which tho left of the second division will rest. 618. The colonel will than command : 3. March (or donlU jiiicJ.— Mabch.) 519. At this commond, the chief of tho first division will go to its right, and command : /ifjW— Dkess. 520. At this, the division will dross np Bgninst the markers ; the chief of the division, and its junior captain, will each al-gn the company on his left, and then com- mand : Fkont. 521. The three divisions, faced to the left, will pnt them- selves in, march ; the left guide of the secopd will direct himself parallelly to tho line of battle : the left gnides of the third and fourth divisions will march abreast with the guide of the si cond ; the guides of the third and fourth each preserving the prescribed distance between himself and the guide of tho division which preceded his own in the column. 622. The chief of tho second division will not follow its niovomont; he will see it file bv him, and wlieu its right shall be abreast with him, ho willcominand : 1. Second Division. 1 Halt. 'i. Frost. 523. The first command will bo given when tho divi- eiou shall yet have seven or eight paces to march ; the .■second, when tho right guide shall bo abieast with the chief of tho division, and the third immediately after tho sernnd. 524. At tho second command, tho division will halt; at the third, it will face to the front, and if there bo open- ings bo" ween tho files, the chief of the division will cause tham to be pioinptly cloBtd to tho right; the left guides of both companies will step upon the line of baitlo, face to tho right, ncd place themselves on the direction of the markers establiBhed before the first division, each guide opposite to one of the three left files of his compaiiy. &25. Th-^ division having faced to tho f'ont, its chief will place himself accurately on the lino of battle, on the left of the first ilivisioti; and when ho shall see the guides assured on tho direction, he will command, liiylit — Drrss. At this, tho divfbiou will be aligned by the right. In the manner indicated for the first. 5211. Tho third and lonrth divisions will continue to march: at the command halt, ^\\n to the second, the chief of tho third will Imlt in his own person, place hira- solf exactly opposite to the guide of tho second, after this division shall have faced to the front and closed its filed ; he will uco his division flio past, and when his right guide shall be abreast with hiui, ho will commond : 1. Third diviticn. 2. H^LT. 3. KnoMT. .'"■27. As soon as the division faces to the front, its chief will pliice himself two paces before its centre, and com- mand : 1. Third division forward. 2. Guide right. 3. MABCn. 528. At the third command, the division will march to- wards tho lino of battle ; the right guide will so direct himself as to arrive by the side of the man on the left of the second division, and when the division is at three paces from tho line of battle, its chief will halt it and al gn it by tho right. 529. The chief of tho fourth division will conform him- self (and the chief of the fifth, if there be a fifth) to what has just been prescribed for the third. 530. The deployment ended, the eolonol will command: Guides— Posts. 531. At this command, tho guides will resume their places in line of battle, and the markers will retire. 502. If the column be in march, and tho colonel shall wirh to deploy it on the first division without halting tho column, ho will make the dispositions indicated Nos. 512 and 513, and when the first division shall have ar- rived at three paces from the line, he will command : ( 1. O" the firsl division, deploy column. 2. TicUtalion by th» Itj't Jlauk. 3. Mabch (or double quick— Mxuca.) 533. At tho first command, the chief of the first divi- sion will cantion it to halt, and will command. First division ; tho other chiefs will caution their divisions to face by the left flank. 534. At tho command march, briskly repeated by tho chiefs of the rear divisions, the chief of the first division will commfiiid, Halt, and will align his division by tho right against the markers ; the other divisions will face to the left, their chiefs hastening to the left of their divisions. The second division will conform its movo- B'.ents to what is prescribed No. 522 and following. The third and fourth divisions will execute what is pre- scribed No .')20 and following; but the chief of each division will halt in his own person at the command march given by the chief of the division which precedes him, and when the right of his division arrives abreast of him, he will command : Such division, hy the ri'jJU JlnnJ: — March. 535. The lieutenant colonel will assure tho position of the guides, conforming to what is prescribed No. 431. The major will follow thq movement abreast with the fourth division. 5oG. If the colonel shall wish to dejdoy the column without halting it, and to continue the march, the mark- ers will not bo posted ; tho movement will be executed by tho samo commands and the same means as the fore- going, but v.ith the following modifications : 537. At tho first command, the chief of the first divi- sion will command. 1 Guide rif/IU. 2. Quicklime. At tho command, Double quick — MAUciir given by the colonel, the first division will march in quick time and will take the touch of elbows to tho right ; tho captains will place themsalves on tho right of their respective companies ; tho captain on tho riglit of the battalion will take points on the groiffid to assure the direction of the march. The chief of the socend division will allow his division to filo past him, and when he sees it right abreast of liim, he will command. 1. Second diiisiun by the right jlank. 2. March. 3. C'itHrto to one of thf three ri(;hf files of tho left company ol the division ; the lieutenant colonel will then place himself nn the line of battle a few pacoa l>eyoad tho point at which tho right of the third division will refit whi-n deployed. 616. The coio&el will then command : 3. Mabcu (or tloulk' quick— 'MxncB.) 64C. At this command, the three right divisions will put themselves iu march, tli.' guide of the lir^t so direct- ing himseiras to pass three piicts within th'f line marked by the ritht jrenenil guide. The chiet of tiie third divi- hion will not follow i(H movement ; he will see it tile past, halt it when its loft guide shall be abreast with him, and causf; it to face to the fr^nt ; nnd, if there be oi>euings be- tween the files, ha will cause them to be promptly clos<'d to the lelt. 647. Tho chief r,r the fourth divinion, when ho sees it nearly uuniasked by the three others, will command : 1. TuiiiUnlaUnm, furteaid. 2. Citiile left. 3. MA.BC1I. 543. At the command »iiarc/i, which will bo given the instant the fourth is unmaskod, this division will ap- proach the line of battle, and when nt three paces from the markerrt ou that line, its chiols will halt it, and com- mand : Left— D&ZS3. 619. At this command, the division will dross iorvrard BRaiust the markers; the chiefof the divislAU and the junior cuptiiu will each align tho company ou lis right, and then command : Frost. 660. Tho instant that the thiul division isunmiBked, its chief will c.aase it to approach the line of buttle, and halt it in tho nninner jnst prcRcrihed for tho fourth. 651. The moment the division halts, iU right guide and the covering -aergeant of its lelt' company will step on the line of battle, placing theniselvcs on tbu proIong%- tioii of the markcrd tst.iklished In iroiit of the fourth di- vision ; us HI -on as they shall be assured in their positlenx, the division will be aligned as has just been prcscrlbid for the fourth. 6.12. The second and first divinii.ns whir h will have con- tinued to march, will, in suircHMiou, be lialttd and aligned by the left, In tho same mauinr as th i third ; the chiefs of these divisions will conlorm tlieniselvos to what is pro- Bcriliod, No. 5iJi;. Tho second being near tho liuo ol battlo, the command will not be given for it to move ou this lino, but It will Ix! dressed up to it. 65.'J. The deployment ended, tUo colonel will comidan I : (7iu'(/cs— Posts. 664. At this command, tho chiefs of division and tho guides will [OHu.ne tli<.-ir places in line of battle, and the markers will retire. 655. The lieutenant colonel will assure tho positions of the guides bv the means inuioated. No. -Illl, ana the major will follow tho movement alireaxt with the loiirtli division. 560. If the column be in march, and tho coloiu-I shall wish to deploy it ou tho Iburth division, hu will muku the divisions indicated No. 611 and following;; And when the head of tho column blinll arrive within three paces of the line, ho will commanmniKnd, tho chief of the fonrth di- vision will caution it to halt, and wi 1 command, tXiurUi (iirmon ,- the chiefs of the other divisions will caution thoir divi>il ilivision will move his divi- sion forward, conforming to what has just boon prescribed for the fourth. AGO. The clii^f-i of the second and first divisions, after haltiuE their divisions, will eonforu. to what is jircbctibed. No. 562. 6GI. If the colonel should vtIeIi to deploy on the fourth division without halting the column, and to continue to march forward, he will not have markers posted, and the movement will be executed by the same commands and the same means, i^ith the following iiiodiUcatioos : tho fourth division, when uumisked, will be moved forward in quick time, and will continue to march, instead of being halted, and will take the touch of elbows to the left. The third division, on b.iiiig ucmabked, will be moved to the front in ilouble ' following &G6. The directiug division, the insbint it finds itself nnnmsked, will approach the line of battle, taking the guide left or right, according as tho right or left of the coluinn may be in front. Tho chief of this division will align it by the directing fiauk, and then step back into the rear, in order uiomentarily to give place to thj chief of tho next for aligning the ne.xt division. £00. Tho lieutenant colonel will assure the positions of the guides of divisions, which In the lino of battle, tnko the right of the directing division, and the uiBJor will assure tho posili .ns of tho other guides. 607. If tho columu bo in inarch, the colonel will com- mand : 1. On such dirlsion, dcploii column. 2. Battilion, hij the right and left Jiankt. 3. MabciI (or double quick — INUbch). SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX—PART V. 65 5C8. The divislans which are in front of the directing one will deploy by the means indicated, Noa. 657, and following ; those in rear, as prescribed, N*. 633 and followiug. 559. The directing division, whsn unmasked, will con- form to what is prescribed for the fourth divieioa, No. 558. 570. The colonel, lieutenant colonel and ninjor will cenform to what has been prescribed, Nos. 158 and 450. 571. Iq a column, left in front, deployments will be exe- cuted according to thesam^ principles, and by inverse means. Hemarkt on the (Xefloymcnt of columns, dosed in mas'. 572. All the divisions ought^ to deploy rectangularly, to march cff abreast, and to preserve llieir distances to- wards the line of battle. 57.3. Each division, the instant that it is unmasked, ought to be marched towards the line of battle, and to be aligned upon it by the flank next to the directing division; the latter, whether the right or left bo in trout, will al- ways b? aligned by the flank next to the point of ojm«j, when the deployment is made on the first or last divi- 8 on; but if the column be deployed on an interior divi sion, thin divisioawill be aligned by the flank which teas that of direction. 571. The chiefs ot division will see that, in deploying, the principles prescribed for marching by the flank are well {fbserved, and if the openings between the files occur, which ought not to happen except on broken or difficult grounds, the openings ought to be promptly closed to war.^B the directing flank as soon as the civisions face to the front. 675. If a chief of division give the command halt, or the soraraand, by the right rrr left flank, too soon or too late, his division will bo obliged to obliq"o to the right or lett in approaching the line of bittle, and his fault may lead the following eubdisisi in into error. 57G. In the divisions which deploy by the left fliink, it is always the left guide of each company who ought to place himself on the line of battle, to mark the direction ; In divisions which deploy by the right flank, it is the right guide. 577. A column by company, closed in mass, may be formed to the lett or to the right into lin?, in the same manner as a column at half distance, and by the means Icd'cated, No. 602, and following. 578 A column by company, closed in mass, may be formed on the right or on the left into line of battle, as a column at halt distance; l.ut in order to execute this movement, without arresting the march of the column, it ia necessary that the guides «void, with the greatest care, shortening the step in turning, and that the men near them, respectively, conform themselves rapidly to the movements of their guides. Bemarlcs on invcrsioju. 579. Inversions giving frequently the means of forming line of battle, in the promptest manner, are of graatutility iu the movements ot an army. 680. The application that may be made of inversions in tbn formatiocs to the right and to lett in lino of battle, has been indicated. No. 407, and following. They may also be advantageously employed in the successive f ^rma- tions, except in that of faad t« the rear, into line of battle. 581. Formations, by inversion, will bo executed ac- cording to the same principles as formations in the direct order; but the colonel's first command will always be- gin hy inverninn. 682. The battalion being in line of battle by inversion, when the colonel shall wish, by forminc it into column, to bring it back to the direct order, he will cause it either to break or to pU»i by c.impauy, or by division, accord- ingly as the column may have been bv company or by divition before it had been formed into line of battle by inversion. 58;}. When a battalion in line of battle, formed by inversion, has to be ployed into column, the movement will be executed according to the same principles aa if 9 the line were in a direct order, but observing what follows. 5S4. If it be intended that the column shall be by di- vision, with the first in front, or by company, with the first company in front, the colonel will announce in the second command — Ir/t in front, because the bat'alioB being in line of battle by inversion, that subdivision is on the left. 585. Each chief whose subdivision takes position in the column in front of the directing one, will direct hij sub- division till it halts; and each chief whose eubdiviriou takes position in rear of the directicg one, will halt in his own person when xiy> with the preceding ligbt guide, and see his subdivision file past ; aud each chief will align his subdivision by the right. TVhen the column is to be put in march, the second command will be — guide left, bocause the proper right is in front. 586. For the same reason, if it be intended that the laet subdivision shsll be in front, right in front, will be an- nounced in the second command ; the subdivisions will be aligned by the left, and to put the inarch, the second command' will be, giiiile right, because the proper left U In front. PABT FITFH. AhTICLE FiEST. To adcance in line of hallle. 5S7. The battalion being correctly aligned, and sup- posed to be the directing one, when the colonel shall wish to march iu line of battle, he will give the lieutenant col- onel an intimation of his purpose, place h mself about forty paces in rear of the color-file, and face to the front. 588. The lieutenant colonel will place himself alike distance in front of the same file, and face to the colo- nel, who will establish him as ccrrectly as possible, by signal of the sword, perpendicularly to the line of battle opposite the color-bearer. The colonel will next, above the heads of the lieutenant colonel and color- bearer, take a point of direction in the field beyond, if a distinct one piesent itself, exactly in the proloogatiou of those two points. 569. The colonel will then move twenty paces farther to the rear, and establish two markers on the prolongation of the straight line passing through the color- bearer and the lieutenant colonel ; these murkers will face to the rear, the first placed about twenty five paces behind the rear rank of the battalion, and the second the same dis- tance from the first. 590. The color-bearer will be instructed to take the moment the lieutenant colonel shall be established on the perpendicular, two points on the ground in the straight line which, drawn from himself, would pass be- tween the heels of that officer ; the first of these points will be taken at fifteen or twenty paces from the color- bearer. 691. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 1. Battalion, forward. 592. At this, Ihe front rank of the color-guard will advance six paces to the front; the corporals in the rear rank will place themselves iu the front rank, and these will be replaced by those in the rank of ihe file closers; at the same time the two genera' guides will move in advance, abreast with the color-bearer, the one on the right, opposite to the captain of the right company, the other opposite to the sergeant who closes the left of the battalion. 593. The captains of the left wing will shift, passing before front rank, to the left of their respective compa- nies : the sergeant on the left of battalion will step back into the rear rank. The covering sergeant of the com- pany next on the left of the color-company, will step into the front rank. 594. The lieutenant-colonel having assured the color- bearer on the line between himself and the corporal of the color-file, now in the front rank, will go to the posi- tion which will be hereinafter indicated, Mo. 602. SCHOOL OF TUE BATTALION— PAKT V. CG (>'>:>. Tk« major will p1ac« IiimicU liz or elsht pacM on clilirr flrwik of tbr calor-r»ak. r<9f '->r 'f >«'■'« "Mt'-t- — M*iictt>, t: 11 of lljo I«u |. :t Ukiup ollwrn II, . . , thp RcUool of th« c<'iup , lh« i.'-ijx^i*< uu Ills ri,{lit. iiiid the oae un liis lot), vill march lu ibc umi' pirp. Ukiiie rjir« not to turn llfH 1 ir'y '.11' r», lb« cylor-boariT Mipporling the ■ hi,.. ■ rs\ cniiloa will marcb in tbn same : rnuk, cacb maintainlnfc kimv^lf I, with that rank, and mithcroociipy- iuft iiiinti*!! with tlit- muvi-mrnt of the other. .V.'a. The tlirie rorpomlB of the colnr-KUanl, new In tho from rank of tho battalion, frill tntrcji woll nliirnod, ol- l>o>r to elbc'W, beada direct to the front, nnJ without ilr- mnging the line of tboir shouldera ; thi- coiitro onnwill follow exactly in the truce of the rolor-bcarfr, and main- tain the Hame utrp, without lon;;thenin(C or hhnrleninK it, except on an intiination troin the colonel or lieutenant- colonel, altlion^h he Hhould find himself more ur 1 sn than six paces from the olor-r.ink: CiOO. The covering sergeant in the front rank between tbp color-company and the next on tho left, will march *lbow to elbow, and on tho Hnine line, with the three cor- Porali in the centre, bin hctad well to the front. 601. Th« captains of the color-company, and the com- pany next to Ilia left, will conslitut^, with tli" thn^e cor- puriiU in the centre of tho front rank, the banii of ali;:u- ment for both winiiv ef the battalion ; Ihey will march in the fame Bt«]i with tlie color-boarer, and exert (hera- iMtlveii to maititHin their BhonlderH exactly in the square with tlifl dlrtclion. To this end, they will keepibeir lioadi direct to the front, only occasionally casting an eye on tho three c<>ntral corporals, with the sliglltfct pu*«il>le turn of the neck, and if they perceive themselves in ad*auc«, or in the lear of these corporals, the cap- tjiin. or two captains, will almost insensib'y shorten or lin.tben IIk* stei , so as, at the end of several paces, to re);nln tlio true alignment, without giving sudden checks or Impulsions to Ibo wings beyord them respectively. < aa baa just been explained. (i'l::. All tbn othiir captains will maintain thomselvcs CD the ulongations of this basis ; and, to this end, they will c«*t tboir eyes towards llie centre, taking rare to lorn Uio nec» but slightly, and not to dernngu tho direc- tion of their shoulders. fiOl. The cjiptAins will obferve tho march of their com- panies, and prevent tho iiH'ii from getting in advance of the line of captains ; they will not lengthen cr shorten Hep except when evi'leiitly necessary; because, to cor- rect, with too srrnpulons atlentlpn, small faults, la ant to oituse the production of greafor— loss of calmness, silenco and equality of step, each of which It is so important to maintain. tMXS. The men will cooslantly ko'p thoir heads toll directed to the front, feel lightly tlio ribow towards the (ontre, resist pressure coming from the (Unk, give tho greatest attention to the squari-ness of shoulders, and b'>ld tbeniholves always very slightly l.ebiud tho line of the captains, In order never to slint out troni the view of the latter the basis of alignment ; they will from time to t me, r-nt an eye on the color-rank, or on the g'-neral guide of the wing, in order to march c mstantly In tho same step wiih those advanced persons. I'lOU. Tending tho mirili, tho lino dcterniinod by the two markers (A and ii- dicular, he will promptly command : I\)int of direction to the right (or Uft). (AS. At this command, the major will hasten thirty or fori) pacf s in advanca ot the color-rank, halt, face to th. col(mel,aodplai'p himtelfon the ilireclim which the latter will indicate by signal of the sword : tho corporal in the centre of the battalion will then direct hini>elf upon the miijor, ou a cautiou Ircni the colone', advancing, to tl,at end, the oppouiie nhculdor ; the corporals on tiia right and left will conform thomselvcs to his direction. t>()9. The color-bearer will also direct himself upon Ibo mnj'jr, advancing tho opposite rhoulder, the TDsjor causing liiui, at tho same tiflTe, to incline to the right orlefc, until ho sIihII exactly cover the corporal of his file ; the color bearer will tliou lake poiiits un tho ground in this new direction. r,li). Tho two genoral guidus will conform themeclves to the new direction »f ihe color-rank. (111. The olliccr charged with observing tho successive replacing of tb^ iii%rkers in the rear of the centre, will establish them promptly on tho new direction, taking for basis the color-bearer and the oiporal of bis file in the Centre (if tho battHliou ; the colonel will verily the ncAv direction of tho mutkeis. C12. The lieutenant rolouel, fiom the ptsition given, No. 002, will SCO that Ihe two ceulru companies, and suc- cessively all the olbers, conform tbemseives to the new dircctiun of thu ccnlie, but without precipitancy or dis- order ; ho will then endeavor to maintain that basis of .-iligninent for Ihe battalion, perpendicularly toth) direc- tion pursued by the color-bearer. (il3. Ho will often observe Ihe niurcU of the tw» wings ; and, if he discover that the cnptains neglect to oouforni lliemsolves to tho basis of alignment, he will recall their attention by the comuiaud — oi;)< c mtre. 618. It is then of the greatest iinporta'co that the color bearer should direct himself porncndiculnrly for- ward, and tliat the basis of alienment should always be perpendicular to the line purau' d by him. 619. If openings be formed, if the filei crowd eac'i other, if, in short, disorder ensne the remedy ought to be applied as promptly as possible, but calmly, with few words, and as litt'e noise as practicable. 020. The object of the ceneral eu'des. in the march in line of battle Is, to indicate to the companies near the flanks tbo stop of the centre of the battalion, and to afford more facility in establishing the wings on tbo direction of the centre if they should be too much in the rear ; hence the necessity that these guides should main- tain the same step, and march abreast, or very nearly eo, with the color-rank, which it will bo oaay for them to do by casting from time to time an eye on that rank. i;2i. If the battalion happen to lose the step, the colo- nel will recall its attention t'y the command, to /7i(?— Step; cai t lius an{l»th«ir companies will immediately cast an eye on the color-rank, or on** of tlia general guides, and jiroraptly conform themselves to the step. 022 Finally, it is of the utmost importance to the attainment of regularity in the mircli in line cf battle, to Inbituato the battalion toexecute with as much order ;is promptness the movements prescribed No. 607 and fol- lowing, for rcctifyina: tbe direction ; it is not less essential that commanders of battalions should exorciso^themselves, with tlie greatest care, in forming their own coiip iVcril, in order to be able to judge with precision the direction to be given to theii battalions. Article Second. Oblique march in liiie of battle. 023. The battalion marching in line cf battle, vhen tlio colonel shall wish to cause it to oblijue, he will com- mand : 1. liight (or Ufl) ohliqiiK. 2. MaeCII (or donlle quick— HARCn). C24. At the first command, the major will place himsplf in front of. and faced to the color- Ijearer. 02.">. At the command march, the whole battalion will take the oblique step. The ccinpanies and captains will strictly observe the principles established in the school of the company. 020. The major in front of tho color bearer ought to maintain tho latter in a lino with tho centre corporal, so that the color-bearer may oblique neither more nor less than that corporal. Ho will carcfnlly observe, also, that they follow parallel directions and preserve the same length offltep. 027. The lieutenant colonel will take care that the cap- tains and'the three corporals in the centre keep exactly on a line and follow para'Iel directions. 628. Th« colonel will see that the battalion preserves its parallelism; he will exert himself to prevent the files from opening or crowding. If ho perceive tbo latter fault, ho will cause tho files on the ilank, to which tho battalion obliques, to open out. 629. The colonel, wishing tho direct mircli to be re- sumed, will command : 1. Forward, ?. Mabih. 030. At the command march, tlio battalion will resume the direct march. The major will place hinigelf thirty paces in front of tbe color bearer, ami face to tho colonel, who will establish him, by a signal o( the sword, on the direction which tho color-bearer ought to pursue. The latter will immeliatoly take two points on tho ground be- tween himself and the major. 631. In resuming the direct march, care will be taken that tho men d'> not close the intervals vhich may exi-t between the files at once ; it should be done almost in- sensibly. liciiiark/i on the cbliqiie vwrrh. 6.32. The object of the oblique step is to gain Kr«iinil to the right fr left, preserving al the while tbe primi ive direction of the line of batth ; as thus, fnr examp'e: t*n battalion, departing from the line (.<«), arrives (.n the line (r .t1 parallel to (ss) 033. It is then essential that the corporals in tbe centre of tie battalion, and tie captains of companies should f)llow parallel directions, and maintain thunselves at the same height; without which they will give a false direc- tion to the battalion. 0.34. The colonel and lieu'cnant colonel will exert themselves to prevent the files from crowding ; for, with- out such precaution, the oblique inarch cannot be exe- cuted with facility. Article Thikd. To hah the hattalion, marching in Hue of hiittie, omt to align it. 035. The battalion, marching in tho lino of batf'o, when the colonel shall wish to halt it, ho will command : 1. Unttalhn. IIait. 030. At the second rommand, the battalion will halt ; the color-rank and tlio general guides will remain in front ; but if the colonol should not wi^h imm diataly to resume tho advance in line, nor to give a general align- ment, he will cciiunand : Color iiiui geiicYvl f/iiith'!) —Posts. t;:i7. At this command, the color rank and general guides will retake their places in line of battle, the cap- tains in tbe left wing will shift to flie right of the com- panies. 038. If the colonel should then judge it necessary to rectify the alignment, he will Cfnimand : Captains, rectify thtaligmwnt. 639. The captains will immediately cast an eye towards the centre, align thomeWes accurately, on the basis of the alignment, which the lieutenant colonel will see well directed, and then promptly dress their respective com- panies. The lieutenant colonel will admonish such cap- tains as may not be accurnttdy on tho alignment by the command : Captain o/(such) rominnnj, or laptains o/(8Uch) companifs. moce up or fall baric. 640. But when tho colonel Bhall wish to give the bat- talion a g' neral alignment, either parallel or oblique, in- stead ot ri ctifying it as above, in will move some pa;ia o^^t^id ■ of oio (f the general guides (tho right wi'l hero be supposed) and cantion tbe right general guide and the color-bearer to f;ice him. and tlien efltatilish them by signal of the swerd, on tho direction which he may with to L' ive to the battalion. As soon as tliey shall be cor- rectly established, the left general guide will place him- self on their direction, acd' be .assured in bis position by the major. The color-bearer will carry the color-lance perpendicularly between his ejTS, and the two corpora's of his rank will return to their places in tho front rank the moment ho shall face tho colonel. 041. This disposition being made, the colonel will com- mand : 1. Guides— 0^ the Line. 642. At this command, tho right guide ot each ccm- pany in theright wing, and tho loft guide of each company in the left, will each place bimaelf on the direction of the color-bearer and the two gouoral guides, face to tlie color- boaror, place himself in rear of tlae guide who is next be- fore him at a distance equal to the front of his compnny, and align himself upon the color-bearer and the general ^ guide beyond. 68 SCUOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. r,\?,. The c«|)t liut in the ri^ht wiop will iliin to tlie I l»rt of Urlr coinpaniof, except the r«pUiD cf the color- 1 company, who will rpmiiJn on !»• right, but lUp Into tlie 1 TMT nink ; the cepUinn In tin- l< ft wing w:ll ehift to the i ileht of their renipaui'-^. lAl. The lifulenunt colonel will prorap ly rectify, if neoeaMry, the poeltlom of the (niidf" of th'> riRht win^, nnd th»> mnjor thnee of t)ie other; which l-olng execnted, the MJonel will command: I I 2, On th* c«i(rf— D«KBS. r.l6. At lliU command, the comptnles will moTo «p in quirk time a{;alntt tb» cuidna. where. harioK arrlred, i each capUin will ft'icn his c»d priaclplvf, (he licutanant oolom-1 aliKnifg the , color-company r>t6. If the aliicnmeat be oMiine, the captain* will take care to conform their compaoiea to it in coDductlni; them toward* the line. i fv47. Tne baitalion being al'gned, the colonel will com- \ mand: 3. Color euid CMMiM— Posts. f*S. At thi* command, the color-b^nr'-r, the general , and coRipnny fcnideii, nnd the captains lo the rifsht v inR, ' will tako their plar<'« in the lino cf batt'e. and the color- j hoarer will replac« the heel of the color-lance ogainat the ri(fht hit'. 649. If th« now direction of the Hue of battle l>e such lli\t one or more companie* find tbrmsAlvos in advance of that line, the colond, before establiHhini; the f^eueral KUldM on the line, will cause ancb cnnipaniea to be moved | to the rear, either bv the back utop, or by first facing 1 about, according as there may be less or more ground to be repassod to bring the (■■)mi«ttDies in roar of the new ' d'recti'n. 660. When the colonel fliall wi )i to giTc a give gen- eral alignment, and tbe color and gen'Tal guides are not on the line, be will caus« them to more »ut by the com- mand : 1. Color and general guidet—Oa the Line. Ml. At this co-nmand, the color-bearer and tin gene- ral guides will plnce themselTos oa the line, conforming to what la prescribed No. CIO. Abticle FoCBTn. Chnngt of dirtction lit marching in line of battle. U2. Tlie battalion marching In lino of battle, when tlie colonel shall wish it to change direction to the right, he will command : 1 . Chanija dirtction to 'M riyfU. 2. March (or double quick — March). i'/>3. At the command march, the movement will com- mence; the color-rank will shortan the step to fourteen or serenteen inch' s, and direct itself circularly to the right, taking care tn advance the left shoulder, but only insenalb y ; the mnjor will place himself before the color- bearer, facing him, and so direct his iiiarrli that ho may describe an arc of a circle neither too large nor too small ; he will also K'o that the coior-bearer takes steps of four- teen or seventeen inches, according to the gait, 054. The right general gnidu will wh«-6l on the right captain of the battalion as his pivot: the left general guide will circularly march In the step of twenty -elgtrt Inches or thirtv-three inches, kccotiling to the gait, and will align blm'tclf on the color-lKjarcr imd the right general guide. Cbb. The corporal placed in the centre of the battalion, will take steps of fourteen or seventeen inches, and will wheel to the ri^ht by advancing Insensibly the left shoul- der; the battalion will conform Itself to the movement of the centre; to this end, the captain of the color-rom- panv, and the ciptain of the next to the K-lt, will atten- tively regulate their march, as well as the direction of their shoulder, on the three centre corporals. All the other captains will regulate the direction of their shonl- ders and the length of their stop on this basis. C.'>6. The men will redouble their aiteDlion in order uoi to pass the line of captains. G67. In the left wing, the pace will bo lengthened in proportion as the &!<• is distant from the contra ; the c«p- f liin ncd in proportion as tlie file la di^tantfrolll the centre ; the ctp- tain who closes the right flank will only slowly turn in his person, oljsorving to ylol J ground n litt le if pushed. rAO. The cclonel will tike groat care to prevent the centre of the battalion from describing an arc of a circle, either too great or too aniall, in orJer that the winga may conform themselves to it« movement. He will see also that the captains keep their companies constantly aligned upon the centre, ao that there may be no opening and no crowdlbg of files. He w 11 endeavor to prevent faults, and, should they o:cur. correct 'hem without nolae. Ot'iO. 7 he lieutenant ci lonil, placed before the balt%lion, will give hia attontion to the aanie objects. •KJl. When the colonel ahall wish the direct march lo be returned, he will command : 1. Foncard. 2. MARCn. CC'.!. At the command marc'i, the color rnnlc, the gen« eral guides, and the battalion will resume the direct march ; the mnj ir will intmcdiately place himself thirty or f 'rty paces in front, face to the colonel, placed in rear of the centre, who will establish him by signal cf the sword on the perpendicnlar direction which tli" corporal in the centre of the battalion ought to pursue ; the m»J' r will immediately cause the color-bearer, if necessary, to incline to the right or left, so as to be oxr.ctly opposite to hia file; the color-bearer will then tike two point ) on the ground between himself and the msjor. CC3. The lieutenant colonel will end-avor to give to the color-company and the nrxt on the left a direction per- pendicular to that pmsurd bv the centre corporal ; ana all the other companies, withont precipitancy, will conform them. elves to that bafi.". AllTlCLE FiriH. To hiiirrh I'll nlreat, in line cf battle. GC4. The battalion being halted, if it bo the wish of the colonel to causo it to uiurch in retra -t, ho will com- mand : 1. Fare to the rear. 2. Battalion, about —Tace. CC.'i. At the second command, the battolion will face about; the color-rank, and the general guides, if in ad- vance, will take their places iu lino; the color-boarar will pass into the rear rank, now leading ; the corporal of his lUe will stop boliiud the corporal next on his own right, to let the color-bearer pass, and then step into the front rank, now rear, to re form the color-flle ; the colo- nel will plaoo himself b'.i, except that they will face to the battal- ion, and that the first will bo placed twenty-paces from the lieutenant-colonel. If the markers bo already estab- lished, the oflicer charged with reiijaciiig them in succos- aiou will cau3e,to face about, the moment that the battal- ion executes this movement, and then the marker near- est to the battalion will hasten to the rear of the two others. 008. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 3. liattalion, foncard. 009. At thhi command, the color-bearer will advance six iMices beyond tlm rank of the file closers, accompanied SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 60 by tli6 two corporals of Ills guard of that rank, the cen- tre corporal stepping back to lot the color-bearer pass; the two file closers noarest this centre corporal will unite on him behind the color-guard to serve as a basis of Hligument for the line of the file closers ; the two general guides will placo themselves abreast with the color rank, the covering sergeants will place themselves in the line of file closers, and the captalus in the rear rank, now leading; the captains in the left wipg, now right, will, if not already there, shift to the left of their companies, now become the right. G70. The colonel will j,hen command : 4. March (or double (jtmiV/j— March). 071. The battalion will march in retreat on the same priBCiples which govern the advance in line : the centre corporal behind the color- bearer will mirch exactly in his trace. i'u'i. If it be the directing battalion, the color-bearer will direct himself on the markers, who will, of their own accord, each place himself iu succession behind the marker UKist distant, on being approached by the battalion: the clhcer charged with the superintendence of Ihe markers, will carefully assure them on the direction. 07:i. In the case of a subordinate battalion, the color- bearer will maintain himself on the perpendicular by means of points taken on the ground. (i74. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major will each discharge the same functions as in the advance of line 67'5. 'iho lieutenant-colonel, placed on the outside of the file closers of the color-company, will also maintain the three fils closers of the basis of alignment in a square with the line of dirtction : the other file clostrs will keep them- selves aligned on this basis. Article Sixth. To UiU tha haltalion marcliing i« retreat, and to face it to the front. 676. The colonel havinj; halted the battalion, and wibh- ing to face to the front, will command : 1. Ftxce to the front. 2. Eallaltoii, aloiit — Face. 677. At the second command, the color-rank, general guides, captains, and covering sergeants, will all re-take their habitual places in line of battle, and the color-bearer will repass into the iront rank. 678. The battalion marching in line of battle by the front tank, when the colonel shall wish to march it in re- treat, he will comman I : 1. Batlalion, right ahunt. 2. March. G79. At the command march, the battalion will faco to the re- V and move off at the same gait by tho rear rank. The principles prescribed Nos. GC9 and following will be carefully oberved. 680. if the colonel should wish ihe battelion to march again by the front, he will give the name commands. Article SEV£STir. CJtange of direction, in marching in retreat. 68t. A battalion retiring in line will change direction by the commands and means indicated No. 652 and fol- lowing; the three file closers, united behind the color- rank, will cenform th?meelve8 to the movement of this rank, and wheel like it ; the centre file oloser of the three will take steps of fourteen (>r seventeen inches, according to the gait, and keep himself steadily at the same dis- tance from tho c lor-bearer ; the line of file closers will conform themselves to the movement of its centre, and the lieutenant colouel will maintain it on that basis. Article EianiH Passage of olstacles, advancing aiul retreating. 682. Tho battalion advancing into line will be supposed toencountd the obatacle, tbe coIodoI will command: 1. Tlurte right ccmpaniet, f'jrteard, iiito hn». GOG. At tbii command, tbe captain of each of tbM* three companies will comman4, by company, ri'jht half tvhctl. The colonel well then add : 1. V^-nlk quick . 2. Marcu. COT. At thli, briskly rtpeated \>y the captiunii of tbe three compani'-" <-iifl" r.n.iHi v will conform ittclf to whaliiprc? • • 1 lowing. COS. It it ' .-• 'Injt cxaropici, that tbe companiea U ^ -„ - .-I't wing; If thoy make I>art of the otlittr, tliey will ext-catc the passage of an ol>- Rtarle arcording to the same prlnciplei and by inverse mi-«n«. I '•'• Wh«n flank compsnics are broken olT to p» s an <.l".tnr1<>, ilio K^ncral guide on that flank will iJare him- Belf eix pares in front of the outer file of the uoarost com- l>iinv to bim remainlDgin line. TiH). Tn tbe pr^ri-dlnp movements it has been supposed that the lialtalinn was marching in quick limo, but if it Ih< marching in double ijnick time, and the colonel chall wish to cause sereral contiguous companies to break to the rear, he will first order the battalion to march in 4. When a battalion, advancinc in lino of battle," shall be olkclu, the culor-rank will return into lino at tbe mi luent the com])auy shall face to the left or rUbt ; the m -Jor will jilaco himself six paces before the extremity of the company behind which tlie color-company marches in column, in order to give tlie step and the direction ; he, himself, firxt taking tbe step from the batlBlion. 707. As soon as the color-company shall have returned into line, the front rank of the color-;;iiard will again move out six paces In iront of the ball ilion, and talto the step from tbe major ; the latter will immeiliiitely place h'.mself twenty or thirty paces in front of the color-bearer, and face to the colonel placed behind the centre of the battalion, who will cBtabllHh bim on tbe perpendicular ; and, as soon ail ho shall be assured on it, the color-boarer will instantly take two points on (he ground between him self and the maj jr. 708. It is prescribed, as a general rulo, that the com- panies of the right wing ought to execute tbe movement of passing obstacles by the left flank, and the reverse for the comptmies of the other wing ; but if th"} obstacle cover at onre iliitoon, into line, and the moment that it is in column, the guide of the first pla- toon will direct himself on tbe marker around whom be has to cl.ange direction in order to enter the dellle. "l*!. The second company will continue to march by the Hank, directing itself pariillelly with the lice of bat- tle ; and it, in its turn, will form I y platoon int < line, when the third company sbull be who ly un the tame direction with itself. 710. The following companies will suocetsively execute what has ju't l)0"n prescrl'" d for tlie second, and each will form by platoon! ■ .no, when the next company shall be on the sitmu dii>.. to'ii with itself. 717. The Hret pl'itoou of ih,' leading company having arrived opposito to the nmrluT placed at the entrance of the defile, will turn to the left, mid the follow ing platoons will all execute this movoinent at the same P' int. As the hist companios will not bo able to form platoons be- fore reaching the dellle, they will so direct themselves in ontoring It, as to leave room to the left of Ihii in ivemunt. 718. The battalion will thus pass the di-file by platoon; and, aB the two platoons of each comjiany sliui' -'ear it, CO > panics will be successfully formed by the meiiiif. ,udi- cated, school of tbe compiny, No. 'J!73, and following. 719. The head of the column liavlng ilearod the defile, and bai'lug reached the distance at wliich the colonel wishes to re-form line faced to the defile, ho may cause the leading company to turn to the left, to nrolong tbe column In that direction, ond then form it to the left into line of battle; cr he may halt the column, and form it into lino of battle faced to the rear. 720. If the defile be in the rear of the right flank, it will be passed by the left ; the movement will be executed according to the same principles, ard by inverse moans. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 71 721. If the defilo be too narrow (o receive the front of a platoon, it wiil be passed by the flank. Captaine and file cloflers will be watchful that tbo files do not lose their distances in marching. Companies or platoons will be formed into line as the width of the defile may permit, or as the compaui shall irely clear it. Article Tenth. o manh hj the /Ion . 723. The colonel, wislung the ba'talion to march by the flank, ho will command : 1. BaUalion. 2. night (or Ip/c)—!? &cr.. 3. ForioanL 4. Mabch (or doiMe m)c7;— March). 72."?. At the second command, the captains and coverine sergeants will place themselves as prescribed, Nos. loG and 141, school of th« company. 721. The sergeant on the left of the battalion will place himself t^he left and by the side of the last file of hia company,Toveringth6 cuptains in file. 725. The battalion having to face by the Ic't flank, the captains, at the second command, will shift rapidly to the left of their companies, and each place himself by the side of the covering .sergeant of the company preceding his own, except the captain of the left company, who wilt place himselt b.r the side ef the sergeant on the left of the battalion. The covering sergeant of i he right com- pany will place himself by the right .side of the front rank man of the rearmost file of his company, covering the captains In file. 720. At the command march, the battalion fu'-t. it- ciiDtniii uill rsiiM. It to tarn to tho ri;: ' • - ■ ■ f so •■ to RrriTO I f'j' < II ho hliall be at tl:! . . ■ ! riiiiHii:i:ii . 2. JiaUaUon, about — Face. 'i. J3iicompany,lrflhalf whrel. 4, MAItou (or double fyiiict— Makcu). 702. At the second command, all the companies, except the right, will face about. 70S. At the third, the captains, whoso componies have ficed about, will each i>Iace himself behind the centre of his company, two paces from the front rank, now tho roar. 704. At the fourth, these companies will wheel to the left on the fixed pivot by tho rear r.auk ; the left guide of each will.MRoen aihe ii able to pMs, pUco bimself on the left of the rear rank d his company, now becom* Uie right: and when the colonel shall Judge tbat tbo compa- nies have KuQlciently wheeled, he will command : 5. Fortran!. 0. M.lEcn. 7. Guide lefl. 7G5. At the sixth command, tho companies w'll cease to wheel, march straight firward t >wards the new line of batilu. and, at the sevcuth, tuko the touch cf tho elbow towirds tho Uft. 700. Tho guide of each company on iti right flank, become left, will coafunn bimsiclf to tbo principles pre- scribed, ^o. 748. 707. The second company, from the right, having ar- rived oppo8it<> to the lolt of the first, will turn to the left : tie guide will so direct himself as to arrive parallelly with t::eline of battle, cross that line, and when the front rank, now in the rear, shall Im thr^e paces beyond it, tho captain will cnimand: 1. t^cund cuiiipaiitj ; 2. Halt. 7(9. At (he second command, the company will halt; the files which may not yet be In lino with tke guide, will prcilijtly comn into it ; tho captaiu will ctuso the com- pany to facs about, and then ali/n it by tho light. 70'.). All the other <• iiipanies.will t.vecuti- what ba^ Just bei'u prescribed for too Hocond, each as it suooossively arrives opposite to the loft of tho company that precedes it on the new lin» of battle. 770. The formation being ended, tho colonel will com- mand : (.'l(l(f0S— roSTB. 771. Tbocoloufl will cause o change of front on the left company of the battalion to tho rear, according to the sanio principles and by inverse moans. 772. In changes of front, tho colonel will give a gene- ral fuporintoiidonce to the movement. 77.1. Tho liintciiunt colonel will assure the direction of the guides as they succosHivoly move out on the line of battle, conforniiQK hiuMolf to what has been prescribed In tbo Bucccsiive formations. remarks on chan/jes of front. 774. Wheu tho new direction IsperpendicuUr, or nearly so, to that of the hatulion, the companies ouiiht to maku about a hilf wheel (tho eighth of tho circle) hef.ire march- ing straight forward; but when those two lines are oblique to each oth.T. tho Kinnllor the angle which they firm, the less ought tho conipiinies to wheel. It is fir the colonel to judge, Hccording ti> tli i iiu«le, tho tirecise time when ho ought to give tho command viarcli, after tho caution forward, if he cannot catch the oxact moment, tho word of execution blioiiM rather bo given a littlo too soon, than an instant too bile. 775. \Vbcn the old and the new lines form an angle of forty-flvo or fewer degrees, the colonel Will Iin<1 it neces- sary to arrest lli > whoel of the companies wli 'n thf> marching flanks shall have taken but n IVw poci h. er, it may bo, have but disonciigod, respectively, from the fixed pivots of tho next companies ; a'.d in all such coiies. tho companies will arrive so nearly pamllel to tho new line, as to be able to align llu>mi>s will each, at the command march, place himself on the right of bis company, and align it by the right ; the captain of the fourth will them place himself in the rear rank, and the covering sergeant in the rank of file closers, at the moment the captain of third shall come to its left to align it. 798. The deployment being ended, the colonel will com- mand : Guides — Posts. 799. If it be Ihe wish of the colonel to cause the tiie to commence pending the deployment, he -will give to order tj that effect tu thu captains of the fonrth and fiftii 74 SCHOOL or THE BATTALION— PART V. roTipnTiloi, a-»i1 th? flr' «lll bi czeoit:d acv>.dIog to the pii ci|l < vrO'cr.b d K '. 4:i6 8><>. TUi to>u bri K «li t>d pi'7 H witDuut bill'i'K t' • ■ ril im 1. ho wU cnuta tlifee njirkT* lo t^e posted nn thp li<.e ul h.U<. hcc>'ami.i f « " ec 1 iiu ■. N • 531 »• l 1% H'l ih<- c>i-'al<"< ' f 'l>e lOi.lb Hiiu fliili cumjia- nis- W. I • 1 i;ii Ibeir c wpantes b . < be r glit. 8 2. riiiu y ttif ool nil Kn) to coi t nue to liiarcii III liiC uid-r ot •> III ■. I>(i »il' li< t CuUie tn i t'l-r* t'> la I'S'iil'lirhttl Ht tue h al •Till c lumn. I'l,» moVr- in-ii( Mill be t-xecnu-d l>> t o loi. m •bill ubd lurHiiS io- diCileJ «u. &UU ob-eiviiff uimt f .1 i«ra. At tl.o fliSt C'>'ii liii 'f1, tbe c'liel til; flrnt ■ii\lM.iD will c'>uit> ami, Q»ide Hint At ih^ c>iiiiiiiafio iiitrch III «{r. Hid itis ui-n. lit imiii- pr iiiKili'* oi ibo ma'cb lu Mae if bi'in. Ibo to ' p ii'leo w 1. t ke t) « q ick auip by thu Ci/iam lid of ILer cnptil n-, «« ticy iUtCJ»»lv y HrriVe li> )>ii-. X'lv iii{ivi mi-iii c mpittfil. ilie . uiuiiul may cause b&ilaliuD to tuarch lu duut^io qii;ck limo. To form On doubU column itlo lint qf biUU, /aetd to lh» rijjkt or ItjX. t03. Tbe d?lim'), being nt company diitaiiM Atiil ; wU n tiiu >'0'i)n.ommitud : 1. T.itihl inln line toAee'. U/l companiei on the right into lii». 2 Ux Ulijn, guidi riylU 3. Makch (or doubl* ^ick — 'il.i.tiCu). 8H. At the drat commaDd, encb onptaln will place bt i.Kcif b< f Iju Hiciiid comtiiaiid, tbe left gnldo of the fourth rnmpary will place himxelf brUkly oa (be direc- tion cf thu riglit ^iiiJi/R nf Ml' coiuiiiii, lucu to iIkiu, an I oppoaite to t>.,a ot the three laat fili-a uf bia c iiiimDy wben in line or buttle; the lieuteuant-colonel will atauru b.m la that posiiloi:. bOO Allliec mmaiid marcA, briakly repented l>y bII tbe captaioa, the ri^lit C'lnipinica will form to t o right into line of I Attle, thu left c^'ini'aaiea wlil put themwiTea lu niiirob Id order to form on tb« iiKlit into lino of battle; tbui« orniait'iuH will becxiiriited by themciiuii indicated Ho. 391 and lolloping. No. 'lIC und lollowliu ; ibo lioutoii- HDt-coloual will HHBuro tbe ku'<1>'k of the lo't ving oD tbe Udr of iHtile aa they aiiciieaiitvoly come upon it. 807. If tbe columu be lo march, the colouel will com- maud : 1. B'glit xnto Unt icheel. 1. Jjtt oompinxti, on tht right into line. 3. Unit lim, guiit rijht. 4. Ma.uch (or doMt quick -JIakch). 803 At t ■« fl-«t commnn', eich oaptnln will place hiiiigelf promptly b fire the cuiitre of bin c mpany ; tbe T Kht compaiila-i wM be cautioned that tb •}• will have to wU el to th'i inht and the 1' ft lompuiic* thit they ■will hive to f.im OD ilierl/ht ntoline. i hef" form alonu "(111 \t'i exiculej uj prescillHd ti«» iOZ.iM, and lol- °8lo. If the colotel should wish to move the b.ittallon forvrnri}. at the momi-'iit ih* r'fcht compaAUa hara com- pleted tba whtfel, b« wi I C'.mio«nd : 6. .fbrvard. 6 MiiBcn (or do*Ale ^icir— Mibcb). 811. At the ccmmnnd fono rd, tVie rupiaioa of anl'M will c mHtid march ih right c mpaoie < »l'i cI-h«i» to wheal and maicb mralg.'it l>ir«raid. 'Iba clonal will tbaa add: 7. GiUdtc«nti: 812. "h** m"Tem'nt of the loft cnmpanici will b'- line p.-.cb capt in will cnaie bla compatiy to uiaic'i in qui) k t rao. 8i3 Th-3 cii'uran may be f ritifd faced t< the lifi int« line I f bit le nciordinir to the >ame princlplei. £14 If the colum i be cln-iol in mils') I ' Rie<«d ' fat com- pnny dia ance, t..fs' m'jvcnie. la «lll be <"Tern»fd ac- (orilttjg to tD'3 prJD^ipKa iruscr.bod No«. 417, 603, aod 6l0. Jiemark on tht dtp^oymenl of tht douliU column, 81&. Thedrpthof ilm d'^uble c lumn, at compary dla- tniicp, I I'll K InMiimlileriibli'. c] '»iUK 't in mnaa, ii at a b It, in uriii-r t.> d"i'l'<> li. ma} bi> Irpensed w ib ; bjt If It be lu tuarcli, it will L>« i TolcrubU t cauit: ilao to cloae, lu halting, l>clore drploi i"g. 8 I'l. The duub e c iluruu ulU h« d«>plo^ed habiti ally oo the K-ntre coiii|miiii-a. but ttic colvijt-l ninv aumrilmta dr- pi \ It uu any iai.iior tuiii^any, or on lb* brat or eikhlb cjiiipauy. AETICLS FOCRriEWTH. D'lpositioni againit dvalry. 617. A ha'tall n being In crlum- by e< mpaoy, at fbU dlat^uce right in troDt, a'd nt nhsl', wlou b f rni It Into sqnaie, be will fir t CoHM di l>ioa3 to te foruitd ; wbicb bcii.g doLe, he will cum- laaud: 1. To form tqnart. 2. To half distanet, clou column, t. XtiAHCB (or double quick — Uahcu). 818. At the command march, the column will cirae to company diatai ce, the aicouu . Ivi»iun taklQjj ita dlataoca ,rom tbe re^r nink o' thn limt diviaioii. 819. At tb m ni>'iit of halting ih» fourth divlalOD, the fill clotera ol euch con puny ui which it la compuaad, pana vii l>y the ouiur fltiik "I tholr cumpaniea will piac« .heinse'Tea two pHces bL-li re the fr. nt rank oppos le to t> cir respvclive ilacis lu liue of battle, aud face towarda ibi' hta t of (ha coliiuin , S20. At the coiumonccment of tbe raoTement, the m«J"r will place himvoif oD the riKbt of the column abreaat wilb Ibo fli'Nt divmlon ; the biiKli-ra tornifd luio I wo ranka will placH thi'iuM'hca at p!aI bark Into the line of fl'e closers opposite to liU plare In line of liait e, Bnrl will be replace'! by 'he oorpoial of his fi'o, who Is in the rear rank ; ihe corpriral of ttie mm-^ file who is in the rank of tile elisors will stpp into ther^ar rank. 825 The chief of the furth division will couimand : 1. Iburlh divUion forward. 2 Guide left, and |..laCB birn self at the 8>iint) lime two paces outride of ihe left fljok. 826. These dl8po3ltioDd ended, ihe colonel nill com- mind: March (or douhU jutcfe— Maech.) 827. At this command, briskly rt rented, the first dl^l- Bion will stand fait; but Its right fll» will f c« to the right, And I s left file to the left 828. The oompatiiea of the ^ei'ond and lhlr<1 dlTlsions will wheel to the right nnd left into line, and the buglers will advance a s ace equal to th» froi.t of a c(>mp>iuy. 820. ThH fourth division will close up to form the Bqnare. and when it ^ball ha\o closed, the chief will hul t it, face it about, and align it 1 y the riar rank upon the Ruides of the division, who will, f>r this purpose, ifaiiiin fecfd to Ihe f ont. The junior laptain will p:is8 into the re.ir rank, now becoi e tbe trout, anl t e covrlng sor- reant of the left corapiny will place himseif buhl; d lilm, in the front tank, bee me rear. Tlie tile ci i.-ers will, at the same tlm , close n ' a puce on the front rank, and the oater flie on each fl.ink of the divisi n wiil ftio > outward-. 890. The square beli^g formed, the colonel will com- mand : Gui'rfes— Posts. 831. At this crmra'ind, the chiefs of the first and fourth divisions, as w II as th>) guides, will enter the squ'ire. 632 The captains whose cnrapanies have formed to the right into line, wiil remnin on the kft of their compa- nies: the left guide of • ach of (hose companies will, in the rear rank, covj'r his captalu, and the covering ser- fteant of each will place himselt as a file closer behind the riiht file of his compHny. 8,S3, The field and stalT will enter the square, tl e lieu- tenant colonel placinir himself behind the left, and the mf jor behind the right of the first division. 814 If the battalion presenf ten, Instf'ad rf eight eompanie'. th« fnurti (. A batta'ion ought cever to presen*', near fio enemy's cava ry, an odd lo pany. Tbe odd company, under that oircumstacoe, ought, whei the battalion is under arm", to be consolidated, f^r the time, with the other companies. 836 1 he fronts rf 'he Fq'iare will be de"> gnnfed bs fnl- lows: the flrpt divisi 'n nil nlways bi the first front ■ the lH*t division, iliH^/bttrCi front ; the- right Ci'nipnuies "f the other dvp|^n< will f iMi ihf fee ndfr n<; nnj iho left oompanies of ih'? S!»m> d*vi ions iha third front. i-tl. A biit'ali on h> Ing In column hy cinpatpy, at full distance, rig'it in front, and In miroh. wh'n il e cJonel ■hall wish t.> f rm s owre. he will c-in-e this movemi .t to bA uter files will f.co to the righr and efr, the rtst of the moviment win be executed as . rescribtd ^o. B.:8 and following 612 The I'eu'erant colonel snd tho mpjir. at tho command march, will ooBf im to whit Is p escribed, No. 822. t43. If Ihe haftnllon, before the sqtiare la forn'sd, beln double CO nmn, the t*") leading comi auiea w li f irn tho first 'rout, Ihe wo rear companies thetonrili ; iheoih r companies 1 1 the right t elf baiia'i n will f'rni the fee tij, anl th i-e of the !■ (t ha f Dittaiion the tlur 1 tiout. f44. The fir.tt and fourth fronts will bo commau(?e1 by the chiefs ot tho fist aid f > rth divisions; e.ch uf the other t«o by its 81 nior cnpialn. 845. The commmder of each front will place himself four paces be iud its pre'^eit renr rnnk, s, and the colonel shall with to f im it into square, he will first caitse it to take Cumpany distance ; to this eO'tct he will command : 1. To form squire. 2. By the head of lolumn, take ftj// distance. F48. The divisions will take half distance by the mrnns indicated. No. S24. and following. What is prescribed. No. 820, will bB executed as the first and tecoud divisions are put In motion. 840. The colon 1 will halt the column the moment Ihe third divi^ion shall have it distance. As soon ai the column is halted, the disipositions li dicated. No 810 will be executed, and when these are completed, tho colonel may proceed to forns square. 860. If tbe column be in march, he '^\d^ also, in tb9 fi'Bt piece, cause coinpanv liistance to be rak«Li, and, for this purpose, will oommaml : 1. To form tquare. 2. By the head of column, tfihe half dlt- tance. 8. M.^&ca yOf double ijuick-'M.^KCii.) 851. This movement will be executed aspre'cribrd I^o- 33J, and lollowing. What is pn sorioed. No. (j2 '. will b« eYucTited as the first aid second ulvhl ns aie put lu mo- tion. i5i. Tbe cf lonel will proceoil to form tqn«re tho me- m>M.t tbe ilrr.i divlnl n shall have it^mlMan «; Ht iho c mniaii I form square th-i 'il

    mm.iud: 1. Bn (^x\ch)fiontfo U)ird 2. MAKCn. 6£5. If it ho snt'posed fh it the advnnn h< mi 'e by (b» flrot fr jnt, iheih ef of Ihia front will c m i ai.d : 1. First divisian, forwar^. 2 Guide centra. 856. The chief rf the seconl front will (acr Irs frnnf to the lefo. Th captnihs ot iho c TOpiniits loinp' si jc ilils ».rcnt will place ihem-Clves outade, uLd wu ihail^Ltof SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— rAKT T. 76 thkir left foidoi, who will tbm r»pUc« »liem In the froni rank ; Ibf rhlef of ihe Ih rd front will fiic« Lis frrnt I" Ihe rlKht. »ud the captain* inthl«frout will place ih*mwlTBt oultidf, and on the left of their covering ler- reaott ; the ctilef of the fourth ftont will fcc* KIs front • rout, and command: 1. Fourth liitUxon, forxeard. 2. ^imi« e*»lrt. The captain who in In the centre of the flnl front, will l>e charpwl with the dinrtion of the march, and will rrf;ul»te hlmoclf hy the means lnJicat4>d in tbeichjol of the company. No HW. •37. At the Command m«rcH. the pqaare will pnt Itself rn motion : the companies raarchinic hy iho flank will Vw careful not U> loM thoir distances. The chief of the fnorth division will cauac his division to» keep constantly rlcawi on the flanks of the second and third front?. M«. Ttoia moTfraent will only be exccmod in quick S58. The llcutenant-rolonel will place himself in rear « f the flU of direct Ion In order to regulate his march. MO. If Ihe colonel should wl»h to li»U the square, he will ci'iiinand : I. Oattaliun. 2. Halt. )!>ei. At tli« second command, the square will linlt ; the fnnrtb front will face about immediately, nnd without fnrther command ; the second and third fronts will f»re ontwards; the captains of companies will resume their plae4Ht ti-i in square. 862. In moviiiB Ihe square li>rwar.l by the second, tliir J, •r fiurth fronts, the same rules will be observed. 8M. Tha t'attalien beinp; formed into square, when the •olonel shall wish to cause it to advance a greater dis- tance than thirty pacos, he will command : 1. Ibrm column. Kt. The chief of the first front will command : 1. nrti diritu>n forward. 2. Guide Ufl. Vt,. The rommandor of the fonrth front will caution it t> stand fast: the f.mmandcr of the Sfcond front will f aiiM it to far« to the left, and then command, Ihj com- pany, hy flu U/t. The commander sf tlio third iVont will causa It tofaca to the right, (lud then command, Jly mmpany, fcy fiU right. At the raonient tl.o second and ihlrii fronta facn to the left and righ', each captain will paaM to vBbk to the raar the two leading files of bis pompanr. 888. These dispositions being ma'^e, the colonel will •ommaDil : :i. Mabcb (or doiilU 71110^— Mabcii.) M7. At this command, the first front will march for- ward ; Its chief will halt it when it shall have adiancod a s|>a<^e equal to half \U front, and aliffn it by the U-ft. 868. The correBponding companies < f the second and third fronts will wheel by file to th'» left and right, and march to meet each ether behind the centre of the first division, and tb« moment they uuito, the captain of each oompauy will halt his company and face it to the front. The division being re-formed, its chief will aJign it by IheUft. 869. The commander of the fourth front w'U cause it to face about: its tile closers will remain before the front raak. 870. The column being thus re-formed, the colonel may p it It in march by the commands and moans prescribed, Ko. 164, and fullowlng; the right Ruides will preBcrve company distance exactly as the directing guides. 871. When the colonel shall wish to re form square, he will give the commands indicated, No. 840. 872. To canto the square to march in retreat a dis- tance >eing formed, Ita fronts will preserve the same designations they bad when face«i to Ihe front. 676. The battalion being in squa'o by Ihe rear rank, when the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat or In advance, a distance less than thirty jraces, he will con- form to what iff proscrl'icd No. 8.'i4 and following; other- wise, 1)0 will re-form the co'umo according to the prin- ciples jirescribed No. SOO by marching forward the fotirtli front. 877. If the square is to be marched to the front s dis- tinct greater than thirty paces, the colonel will face the column by the front rank ; to this end, he will com- mand : 1. To >iiarch in a'lranrr. 2. Fjcf b-j llie front rank. 3. Battaliotl about— V.^CB. 67S. Which will be executed as prescribed No. 873 and following. 879. If the column be marching in advance, nnd the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat, ho w 111 com- mand : 1. To march in retreat. 2. Battalion right about. 3. MiRon (or double quick— yiKV.CH). 880. At the second commiiiid, the file closers of the second and third divisions will place themselves rapidly Itefore the front rank of their respective divisions. At Iho command march, the column will face abont and move olt to the rear ; the chiefs of divisions and the guides will conform to what is jirescribed No. 87-1. £81. If the column be inarching in retreat, and tlin colonel 8hall wish to march it in advauc >, ho will com- mand : 1. Tbmarch in adcance. 2. IlnUalion right about. Z. Mabch {or dovhU juicilt— Mabcii). 862. At the second command, the file closers (if Ih* second and third divisions will place themselves before the rear rank of their respective divi8lc:is ; At the third, the column will face br the Iront rank. To reduci lite square. 6S.^. The colonel, wishing to break the square, will command : 1. Reduce iquare. 2. Mabcii (or doulU ^iiicA— March.) 884. This movement will be exocnted in the manner in- dicat<'d, No. 8<'iH and fjllowing ; but the file closers of the fourth front will place themselves hohind the rear rank the moment It faces about ; Ihe field and staff, the color- benrer and buglers, will, at the same time, return to their places in column. To form $qiiarefrom line of ballh-. 885. A battalion deployed, moy be formed into sqiiaro in a direction either parallel or perpendicular to the Una of battle. kSC). In the first case, the colonel will cause the battalion to break by division to the roar, by the right or left, and then close the column to half distanco, as iudicat«d, No. 817 and lollowing. 887. In the second case, be will ploy the battalion Into simple column by division at half distance In rear of the SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— P^RT V. (igbf. fir Icfi divieiui], ur iuto roluino doubleJ uu (liu ceutre. 888. To ploy the ba^'alloa lufo column iipuu oue of tbe flank dlvIsioQS, tbo colonel will command : 1. Tofonnt([ii. 2. Maecw. iiOl. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon will place themselves in front of the centre of their respect- ive platoons ; the chief of each outer platoon will face bis platoon towordrt the centre, and cause to break to the rear two files from the left or right. At the ccmmaud march, the outer platoons will direct their march so as to double on the centre platoon at the distance of four paces ; their chiefs will alien these outer platoons oif the centre, and tho files previously broken to the rear will come into line. 902. If the column be at half, instead of full distance, tho colonel before forming sijuare will order the chiefs of the third and fourth divisi^i a to move for,vard their di- visions as prescribed No 899. 903. If the column be closed in mass, at J,ho commaml to form square, the chief of the third divi'^ioc will break four files to the roar from each of the flanks as pre- scribed No. 800. 904. Tho colonel will hjilt the column ns soon as the second division shall have gained its distance. 905. If the colonel shall wish the column to contiuno marching, at the command, tlie hyhend of the column tahu half distance, the cliief of the reseive division will give his cautionary commands in snfiicient time to place hisf division in motion bimultaueously with the one which precedes it. Tho chief of the tliird division will give the command viarch at the instant there is company dis- tance between his divisitm and the second. 90G. Whan tho colonel shall wish to re-form the column, at the command f^rm eohimn, the chief of the fourth di- vision will command I'orm division ; at this command, the chiefs of the outer platoons which liave doubled in rear of tbe centre platoons, will give tho commands and make the preparatory movements for deploying on the centre platoons, which will be t-xecutcd at the command march given by the colonel and briskly repeated by tho chief of this division. The division being re-formed, tbe chiefs of the outer p'atooirs will retake their places in column, and tho chief of this division will ngain cause four files from each of its flanks to break to the rear. 907. If before the formation of the square, the column had been left in front, it would be formed by the saiuo commands and according to the same principles. Iho second division, in this case, would form the reserve. 908. The column being formed, if the colonel ciboiild wish to march it in retreat he will face it by the rear rank. The flies of the third divi ion broken ofl' to tha rear, will face about with the battaliun, and wlu>n the column is put in motion will march in front of the rear rank. But should the colonel wish tore-torm tho square, he will cause the battalion to face by the front rank. 909. If the battalion be inline, insteai of in column, the chief of the reserve division will bring it iuto column in such manner that there may bo a distance of only four paces between this division and tho one which is to be immediat«ly in front of it ; and when this division is halted and aligned, its chief will canse the usual number of files to be br.ken to tho rear. The chief of the divis- ion which should occupy in column a position immediate- ly in rear ot the reserve division will, on entering tho column, take a distance of twelve paces between it and the division established immediately in front of tho reserve division. Squares in four ranks. 910. If the fquares formed in two ranks, according to the preceding rules, should not be deemed sufficiently strong, the colonel may cause the square to be formed in tour ranks. 911. The battalion being in column by company at lull distaqce, tight in front, and at a halt, when the colout-l shall wish to form square in four rank^, he|will first cau.so divisions to be formed, which being executed, ho will command : 1. To form equnrc in four ranks. 2. To halj^ distance, do a column. 3. March (or double quick — March). 912. At the first command, the chief of the first divis- ion will caution the right company to face to the left, and IB SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PAKT V. the Itft compkoy to (ao« to tb* riKbt. The cblrfs^of tb« otb'^r (JiTitiuas will cAutiuD ibuir diTlsiout to muTe fur- ward. 013. At tbe cnmmiDd march, the riebt c> mpany of thi- flr«t di'Ufoa will form iuu> font raolts on il8 left file, aod ihe left compaDj into fuur r 'nko im its rif;ht flle. The fttrma liii|il<'Ud, *ftch chlpf (if diTis- I inn will command. Guilt UJt. E >rh chief will halt his i <1ivi,il D whe' it ^ball b«v<- the di-tanco of a company front in four rank" from the precoiinj; on<>. counting from i its -fiir THTik, and will alig" bis divi-.ion liy lhi> left. At | the instnu* thn fo'-r h dirigioii is halted, tUo tile closers i will mr T« tapidlj before its front rauk. I 9'6. The c loiK'l will fo'm bqnare. rx-form column, i and red ice f-qnare in fourra-ik-, Ijy th« sime c imniauris and m-Hn" (i» preBcribed 'or a haitalioi; i'l two lank^. I 016. II ih<' s<|n re firmed In f ur lanks hi- rtdnctd and I at a halt, and the colon) I sli.ill wish to foinithe bntlaliun ' into two ranks, he will conimaDd : 1. In Itro rank* unrlou'tU' filet. 2. B'ltlnUon oulwartli — Face. 3 March. 917. At the first command, the ciptains will step be- fore the centres of thfir resiiectlTe romiianioB, and th ifo or, the right will GHUtion them to face to the right, and th >ee on the left to f ice to the left. 918. At thu second comiaand, the batta'iun will faot.- to the right and It ft. 919 At the Command march, each company will un- douhle its flies and re-form into two rank- hi in'Hcated in the s liool of the conipany No. 370 and followlTiif. Knob cuptaiu will halt hin company and ftce it to th- front. Thn format on vnipleted, each chief of division will align biK division by tiie 'oft. 020. If ih" c flumu b<< 'n Tarch. with division* formed in four ranks, and the colonel xliall wish to re-fjrm them into two ratiks, be will command : 1. 6ui'g torcnel into two ruuks, the colon 1 will command, fiuidf let (or ru/ltl). 0^3. To form rquare in f mi ranks ou one of the Hank di- vision-, the culouui will cooimnud : 1. Toform Siftfre. in /our ranks. 2. Vrdnmn ut hulf dit- t nee hj/ dicUirm 3 Onlli^Jlrtt (or fourth) division. 4. Bitlalion rij/ltl (or le/l) — Fahe. 5. Mabcu (or doubU: r/uick-'MAB.CU). 024. At the pooond command, each chief of division will plHO- himself befo e the centre of bisdiNision, and caution it 'o fare t • ih» right. 02''. At the fourth commai't, the rig tgu'deofthe first diviilon "III renain fi,ced tj th.- front, thj bittulion will (sof 10 tlie rijibt. 026 At Ihe nouiin ind marcA. the Arst flle of four men of the flrsi divii-i m wii| tac*' to the front romiiiuiD!; doubled. All iho oilier iihs of four men will step off lo^'eilier, and each i i i-nc^ anion ••ill clobe up to iis proper dista ce on the fllo prec-ding it, and fMco to th^ front, rem-ining donlded. W en tbo lust flle >-hall liavu c osed, ^be chief of d'vsion willc mmand, Left— I)ur.f.n. 027. I he o her tJl iaioos Will pli,y into column in the same mmner as with a I attalinn in Iw., runks. obiervln,^ what 'ollowb : lliec 1 fs r-f .Jivisi >n, iiintea file of four man will aho halt at tbe fame lime and tars to the froiit, remaining doui led. The second file will ch-^e on the f^«t, and wbvn cloaed, hikit, end face to the front, remaining donblad. All th* other flios will r the s>^oud. When the last file RbHll hive cloK-d, the cbi< f uf diviki in will command, X^f—Daasa. 9'2'^. If the hAttalion be in march, the colonel will oom- maud : 1. To form tquare, in four rank: 2. On Ike firtt diwieion, form colli mu. Z. Battalion, by lite right flank. 4. MaaCB (or double quick — HAkcu.) 929. At the second commtnd. each chief of dMainn will rt p in troe t I tlie lelt, and those on Ihe left to face to the right. The : captain of the fifth company will caution his Odveriug I 8erK>-ant to stand fiet. 933. At the third rommaud, the battalion will face to the left and right ; at the ciin naud march, the le''t file of the fourth, and the right tile of the flub company will then face to the front, reniair.ing doubled. The lonrth conipany will rio-e snccefsively by flle of fours ou the left fl'e, and the fifth conipiiTiy, in like manner, ou the right filH ; the files will f.ice to the front, remaining doubled. The formation conipleieil. the chief of division will com- manii, /i' ght drem 'I'lie junior captain will pl.ice himsilf in Ihe Interval between the two compauiex. WH. Trie other conipaiii"H will close as prescrib'd for the iio^.l.. column in two rank*, observii g what fellows : euch c-iptsin will hall th» leading guide of bis company the moment the h ad of h's company arrives o . a line with ibe centre of ibn r dumn. In the right oompanlen, the left eu des will step into the line of til" cloters, and Ihe left tile of four men will fu-e immediately to the front, r-niaiutng doubled, and by the side (f Ihe rlKht guide of tho left c mp' mpleted, the junior lapialn will pl-ioe liimself letw en >h« two oompauies, Hnd the senior Will ] comma'id, RiylU drees. 036. If the batlAlioo be in march, the colonel will com- mand : 1. To/orm square, in fimr ranks 2. Fnrm donbU oolumn. 3 BuUali'n bij the n.jlit and l^ft fianke, 4. AlAbCU (or dUuhle quick — Mabcu ) 036. At the second command, Ihe captains will plana thi-m'-eliei leorc tlie lenlren i-f their ivfp.icthe com- XianiuH, and ibone nn the right w II cant Ion ihem to fnoe liv the U fi fltuk.and thohe ou Ibe left to face by the rivhtflink; tH capluin of the fiiih company will caution his c iveriug sergeant to halt, and remain facjd roth* front. 837. At the command march, the fourth and fifth com- rnuies will halt, 'ibe baiiu.ion w'ii f I re to I lin left and rtgi t; the covering Fergeant of the flub company will halt and remain fared to the front, tbe movement will then ha executed aa If the battalion was at a bait. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. T9 Oblique Squaret. 938. The battalion beins; In IIcp of batMe, when the colonel BhsU uish to fjrm the oblique square, he will oommand : I. To form oblique square 2. On the first dhision form column 930. At thn second oorom.iod, the Hentennnt (lolonel vrlll trace the alignment of ttie flrf^t division In th-' f<)l- lowing manner : he will place liini'telf before and near the right file of 'Ms divisiin, fic> to th(» eft. march twelve paces alone the front rat k, hilt, face to the right, march twelve laces perpendimla ly to thp front, halt again, fa e to the right, and imiriediatoly place a marker «t this point. The coverina; *?rg ant of ihe right 'Om p ny will B'pp, at the same liiiie. beVr» ita richt file, face to the lefr, and CO I form the line f f his shoiiHerB to thntoftho .'hi uWerR of tlie mark r ostablfshe'l by the llen'enant colo el Those two markers being established, the Ueii'enint coloml wi'l placp a iliir.l roark-r on the •nme alignment, at the point where the left of the di- vlelon will halt 840 The chiefs of division will ploce themselves in f^ont of the centres nf ilieir divisions; the chief of the flr.Ht division will Immed'ately establish It by a wheel to th« right on a fixed pivot, against the mtrkers. at d align It bv the left. The chiefs of the i.ther divisions will canffnn them to face to the right, The culosel will then •ommand : S. Battalion nyW— Facb. 4. March (or double quick— March.) 041. Tho three reIfghtly: each will enter the column as prescribed for tlie second, and tho moment the battalion Ir ployed into column, the colouel will canse It to form square. 943. The formation of a batta'-'on into oblinwe square on the left division, will be p«cuted according to the same principles and bv inverse means. 944. ShouM the battalion ie in march, the colonel will first cause it to ha't. 946. In the preceding eismple, the battalion was sup- posed to be deployed ; bat If it be alrrady formed in c 1- umn, the desired oblijniiy will bo established by causing it to change direction by the flank; to this end, the colond will command : I. To form oblique sqxuire. 2. Change di-ection by the rigkl (or left) flank. 940. At the secfl command, the lieutenant colonel will trace the ne* direction in tho following manner : he will place be*'"e the right and the left fll.-s of the headmost di'l'ion, two markers. an,l a third on the pro- longation of the first two on the fide of the change of directloFi and at twehe paces from tho flan ; of the col- umn. He will then place himse f before the third marl'er, march twelve paces perpendicularly to the front, balA and finish tracing tho now direction in tie man- ittT Indicated, No. S39. 947. The colonel will then oommnnd : S. BaUalion, right (or Ufl)—'E'ACS. 4. Mahou {or double juicfc— Mahch). 948. Tbe'change of direction having been 'executed, th« colonel will otuaa the square to be formed. 049. Should the cMnmn be in march, the colonel will firs ca Fe it to hHlt. 9"0. Oblique squares in four racks, will be executed by ih' sime m?»ri8. au'l accordirg to the principles iiro- tcribod lor the fo maiion of iqmres In four rarks. v5'. •» hcthT tho latfalinn he pl.y.d int > simo e ot double colUMin, the particnlir dis' o^iti Ds for the fotma- tion of the jqiaro wi 1 be executed "B piescr bed No. 819 and fnll.)wlti2. Th d.vi-ion whi h is !■. f>rm tb» leir rf Ihe column, will he closed iu m ts« and as soon a* it U aligued, the m-^J 'r will rictiiy the j^osjrinn of ihs I uide< on the gi''e of the colu'en opposite to the direction. 9 2. If it bo the wish of thn co onel mertly to pre- pare fjr tquare. he will in all formations with that vie >• substitute the command prepare for squar$, in plao» of to form square, and In that c-is--, lh» laai diviiioK will enter the culuma at company distance. Remarks on the formation of tquare*. 953. It is a general principle that a column bv company, which is to be formed into tquare, will first form divis- lous, and close to bdlf distance. Never tlieiesa. if It fitd itrelf^uddeniy throatenwd bv cavalry without suffl itent time to form divisions, the colonel will oau«e 'h-i colu nn to close to platoon distance and ihcn form square by the commands and m>'a is which have been indicated ; the leading and rearmost cimpauiea will conforu lhem^e'ves towhathas been prefOiititd f'r divisions In tho»e posi- tions. The olh»r companies will form by plato n to the ri^ht and lefi in o line of bitte, and eacb cbhf (f t)la- toi n, after having halted it, •» ill place biiriself on the line, as if the p'aioon were a company, and he will be covered by the guide in the rear rank. 054. A iiattaMon in columu at fnll rlistance, having to forni.-qutre will always close on the leading s'.bJiilalon ; und a culumn dosed iu mass, will olways, for ihe same purpose, take rtistances by tbe head. In < ither case, the second subdivision thonld be careful, iu taking its dis- tance, to reckon from the rear rank of tbe subdivision in front of it. 955. If a column by company should be required to f rm square in fnir ranks, the diublipg of nks will tthvayj take place on the file next the guide. '.56. When a column, di.'-DOseil to form square, shall be in march, it will ch lUge direction as a column at half distance ; thus, having to execute tl.ls movement, the column will tak^ the gnide on tlie side opposite to that to which the change nt direction is to be made, if that be not already the side of the guide. 9j7. A column doubled on the centre at company dls. tance or closed in mass, may be formej* into square according to the same principles as a simple column. 958. When a baitaliou is plojed, with a view to the square, it will always be in rear of the right or left divis- ion, in order that it m ly he able to commence flrine. pend- ing th^ e.xi'cution of the m rvenient. The double column, also, alTords this advantage, and being more promptly formed than any other, it will habitually be emtiloyed, un- less particular circumstances cause a different lormatlou to be preferred. 959. A battalion, in square, will never nse any other th"iu the fire by file and by rank ; the color being in tho line of file clo-ers, itsguard will not fall back as presor - bod No. 41-, it will fire like tho men of the company of which it forms a part. 9fiO If the equare be formed in fur ranks, the first t wu ranks will alone execute the tiring^ pre-cribed above: the other two ranks will remain either at thoulder or support arms.' 961. The formation of Ihe square being often neceptary in war, and beini; the most complicated of the manoeuvres, it will be as frequently repeated as the supposed necessity may require, in order to render its mechanism f-imiliar to both oihcers and men. 0C2. In the execution of this minceuvre, the colonel will carefully observe that theriivere movements which It involves succeed each other without loss of time, but nlto ' without confusion ; for, if the rapidity of cavalry move- ments requires the greatest promptitude in the formatloa 80 SCHOOL OP THE B ATT A.LION— PART V of sijuarca, bo, on Ihp <'tber li»nd, precipiUnry always reialts in disorder, and in no circamstauce ii JisordiT more to be Bvoldc-d. 903. When tbo colonel ihall wish to c.ivor l>y ■kiriii- iiilierii the mov. ;::'nt» of a colnmn preparini!; to form ■qnare, he will dfi»ch fur this purpose one or two i >nor pUtiwnn of one of the interior diviglnni of the colnmn. In this cfo, the oxtt-ri'ir p'.ntoons of this division and the followiDR BubdIvisloiiH, will, according to circum- staocea, close on the prfc^dinit subdiTitinn, in such man- ucr, that thcr» niFir lie between them only tho distance necessary for furmnj; into line. 9C4. When the colocl Hhall be roady to form squBrc, ho will, in order to rec.'xll tho slcirmishcra. cause ^o thr. color to be sounded. If on the return of the sklnnishers, there be not room for them to form into line of battle, they will double on the outer platoons of tlioir respective companies. ChUimn ngaiiul cavalry. 9G5. When a colunn closed in mass has to form square, it will begin by t.iking company distance ; but if so sud- denly threatened by cavalry an not to allow time for its dispo«ition, it will bo formed in tho following manner: iH>6. The colonel will command : 1. Column iiyaimt eavalv'j. 2. Mahcii. 907. At the first command, the chief of tho leadinp; di- visioD will caution it to stand fast and p^its behind the rear rank ; in tho interior divisions each captain will jiromptly deninnatft th" number of filoi necessary to close tho interval between his carapany and tins one in front of it. The captains of the divisions next to tho one in rear, in addition to closini; the interval in front, will also close np the interval which separates this division from tho last ; tho chief of tho fourth division will caution it to fice about, and its file closers will pasi kriukly biforu the fro 't rank. 'J>,8. At the corammd march, Ihe guides of each division will place themselves rapidly in tho Una of file closers. Tho first division will stand fa-t, the f.)urth will fico Hbout, the ontor file of eacli of these divisions will then face outwards; in the other divisions the files desiftnated lor closing tho intervals will form to the right and left into line, but in the division next to tho rearmost one, the first files that come into lirje will closa t" the right or left until tliey join tho rear division. Tho files ef each company which remain in column wlllclofe on their outer files, formed into line, in order to creuto u vacant space in the middle of tho column. 91)9. If tho column bo In march, tho column ogaxnst cavalry will be formed by the same commands and means. At the command t,iarch, the first and fouitli divisions will halt and the latter division will face about; tho interior divisions will conform to what has been prescribed above. 970. The battalion l>eing no longer thrcattned by cav- alry, tli'3 colonel will command : 1. Form column. 2. MabCII. 971. At the coipmand march, tho files in column will close to th" left and right te make room for those in lino who will retake their places in column by stepping back- wards, except lli'iBo closing the interval between the two rear divisions, who will t'lke their places in column by a fiaiik movement. The fourth division will face about, tlin guides will resnme their (dares. 972. If the colonel should i>o so pressed as not ti) have time to order bsjoucts to bj ll.xoJ, the men will fix them without command or signal, at tho cautionary command, cdliimn against cavalry. 973. As this mane sounded, and at the stms time place two markers and the color bearer in the direc- tion he may wish to give the battalion. 976. Kach captain will rally his company about sis pa- ces in rear of the place It i< to occupy In litie ofb«ttle. 977. The colonel will cause the c*lor company to be promptly establinhed agiiinst the markers, and each cm- pany by tho coaimand of its ca|itiin will be aligoed on the e>lor company according to tbe priuciples heretofore prescribed. 978. When the colonel rhall wish to rally the battalion in column, he will cause /h'\ atscmilii to be souiidsd, and place two markers before the position to be occupied by tho first company ; tho captain of this company will rally bis company in rear of the two markers, and each of tho other captains will rally his company at platoon distance behind tho one which should precede it iu tho order in cdlumn. ABTICI.E SiXTEBilTll. Iiulcs/or manccucring by (h« rear rani: 979. It may often be necessary to cause a battalion to manicuvre by the rear rank ; when the case presents it- self, the following rules will be observed : 9!^0. The battalion being by the f.-ont rank, when tho colonel shall wish to mamuavre by the rear rank, be will command : 1. Face l>/ Iht rear rrnlt. 3. Battalion. Face. 3. About— 981. If the battalion \» deployed, this movement will be executed as baa bci-n indicatd for thu fire by tho rear rank. 952. Iftho battalion be in column by c.impsny, or by platoon, right or left in front, the chiefs of subdivision, to taVe their new places in '^oiumu, will each pass by tho left flank of his subdivision, and tlie file c.osers by the right llank : the guides will placa themselves in the roar; lank. 953. If the column bo formed by division, the chiefs of 'ivision will each pass by the interval in the centre of bis divisiotk, and the file closers by the outer fianks of tlioir respecKt one. 9S5. The battalion being Vid by the rear rank, com- panie><, divisions, and wiug*v will preserve their prior denominations respectively. 98(5. The manduvrcH l.y the reai rank w 11 bo exeout d by tho same commands and on l>iy mn-.e principles an if the battalion faced by the front rank ; b-t in such manner that when the battalion skall be broii(iht to its proiier front, all tlin subdivisions may fihU thumtelvos in their regular order from right to |,.ft 9.S7. According to this principii', when a column fuced by tho roar rank is deployed, tho hiibdivisiona which, in lino of battle bv the front rank, ought to find thomHoUe-i on the right oi^lio snbdivlsiou on wlihli iI,b deployment is made, will fan« to th" left; and those ihich ought to bo placed on its left, will face to the right. 988. When a battalion in lino ol battle, l..^,,i by th • rear rank. Is to be ployed in'o column, the coimol will announce, iu tho comnmn1). Arlicle V.—V im columu into lint; of battle, to he right or left, liy inversion (No. 407). liESSON THiaD. Artiele I — Break by company to the rear hv the ri:ht or left, the b.i talion beiLj,- at a hali (No. 87), or me rexTimed. Article III. — Form t'uecomiun forwaid inio li.ie of battle (Ni 8 440, 45iJ, t"«c d to lh« rear into line of battle ( ni. 466, 180). the bittali',:) bei g at a halt, .;r maruliinL'. Form 111! c< li.niii torwarri into li(.e, and continue the m»rrh ill this "rdi r (No 456). Article IV— T rm the column on tiie rij;ht (No. 416), or the left (No. 4.3^). mo line of bittle Artidt F.— March hy tto- n hiud the line of bnttle (So. 114), to prolong it on thai line. * Article F/T—C 'anpe front forward (No. 743). or io rear (No. 76o), . n the right or !« ft 1 f coiupanie-!, indirections perp. Mlicular or oblique. Article F/77— Maich t.v the right fl ink (No 722) orhy tli.-!efi flnnk (no. 725)'. Chanfie direction hy flU (No. 7.lOj. Form b:) ilr(o. P66 ) Articl' Al — lake d'8ta> ces by the heid (Nos. 323 and 330). or ou retr of the CO umn (No. ;i33), the column beiog at a halt or man-hin^. .drtic/e X//— The column beine: hy compmy, c-«nse to be executed the biove 'eiit^ indie ited in Nos. 3 4. 6. «. 7, 8, 9, 10 a d 11 of ihis lesson. The column being at half ilistaice, or olo.^ei iu nnss. to form to the left, or right, intn line, wheel, on th • rear < f t e column (No. 50') Article Xni — The culuiin bein; by company, form divis- ions fr.m a halt ( o. 361). or in march No. ;<76). Article XIV. — 1 h coliiuin bi ing by division tu lorm it to the left or righ : into line of battle at a halt (No. 401), or :n march (No 402). LESSON FIFTH. Article 1. — The ba talion being in liue of battle, and at a halt, to ploy it by dlvinion int column clor^ed in mass on the right division (No U9) or on the 1 ft division (No. 141), or ouau interior division (No. 143), ihe right or left lu front. Ploy the haltation niarclrnk iu liue of battle on the right or left division f No. 149). Article IT. — Execute the couoterni'ucb (No. 352). .<4 rtcfe //T— tJhinire dire' tc' n 'o ihri ri.ht (.No. 307.), to the left (No. al3) b. the flank . f the column. Article IV. — De-.iloy the c ilumo on the right division (No. 514). on the lefc division (541), or ,->n any interior diTi- sion. tht- column being at a half, or marching (.No. 503). Arlicle V. — Ph.y the luttilion into column by divisio^ at h If distance, marching (No. 656) .4r77) Article VII. — f loy the batiali n into doub'e column, at half dibtincc (No. 777), or closed iu mass (No. 703). the hnrtnlion twfng at • halt, or marrhing 82 TABLE OF COMTKHTS. ArticU r727.— Murch in this order, ana change direction (Xo.7M). Article /J.— Deploy the colamn at a halt (No. 796;, or marcblDf; (No. SOU), and without cuspendlui; ti e omrch (No. H(j2). ArtUie X — Tlie donblo oolomn being at half diHlHOce, lorm It into lino of battle faced to the riaht or left (No. 803),theto,umn being i I march (No. 8(i7) Kx-cu o the rame movement without suBi>ending tlio ni:>rcli (No. 810). ArUdt XI — PeriiendicnlB' or parallel Hquarcit, the bat- talion being deployti ( .• o». 88», 898). Ubliqiie squarw, the batuhou being in Hue of battle CSo. 938), <>r in rolumn (No. 94S). Sqnuree in four rBnkB(No. 911). LESSON SIXTH. AvtiOe /.— Mnrch in line of l>attlo (No. fi87j. Halt the l.aitnlion (N". 636), and iilign it (No. 640). Article II. — C'hant:e din-cliori in line of l>attl<». advini-ing. (No. r,52) or in leir' at (No. 681). Kxeruie jmBssge of obstacles (No ^2). Article ///.—Oblique march in line of battle (No. 623 ) Article IV — Disperae and rally the batl lion in line of bnttlo (No 874). and rally the battalion in cdlamD by company (No. 978). REMABRS OX THE SCHOOL OK THE KATTAlilON. In every course of iiii\\ be ex'cuted several timcK in the order in which it 1* nr- ranged ; nut hh cOon :ik 'h» nttalion Rhiill be conilrnied In the principle" t the esaou, the firm will be pxerulud after the advance in line, and «fter (heviiriouff riha ionn into line of battle, and into snuare. P.irticular atiQutiou will be given to the flrr by (lie, which is that principally umd in war. Kvery lesion of thin uch ol vfill'be executed with the utuiqa' prerJHion : bnt the second, which comprehends the marrh in column, and th ' march in line of battle, being of th'' most 'mjxirtnnce, will W the ofteneKt repeat- o , especially in the Ix-cinning. Gr>Mit aticLiiuii i.ngh , also to be given to the fourth h-Jiiin, which coti prebends the march in column by dlrl- Hio:i, Mu\ the dittpnsitions againut cavalry. The successive formations will sometimes he ezecntod by inversion. In the beginning, the march 'n eolumn, the mnrch in line of battle, and the miiirh hy the flank, will be execut- ed only ir quick lime, and will be contlnu'nl until the battalion sh.ill have beocm- well established in the ca- dence of tlii»«teii. The non cadenced step will be employed 1 i this school only In the lepetition ■ f the movements inoideat to a column In route, or w'^en great cel-rity may be required. Whin It m ly l>e deitired to give th- men relief, arms mity be stipiiorted, if at n h It, or marching by the flaul;. In marching by the front, iirm* may be shift-d to the right shoulder; Itut not in the march in line of battle until the biittnlirns Hhall be well mstrui-led. After Hrm« have been carried for some time on the right shoulni'' , they may bo sliifi-td, in like mnniier, to the left bhnuldor. When a battalioi: is manoeuvring, its nr>vemenls will be covered by a -irni'shers All the companies will be exercisei!. successively, in this service. Wh. n H liattalion, instructed in this drill, fhall !«■ re- quired to manoeuvre in the evolutions u' the li e, its UKivwnientB will \i<- re»:ulated by the iiistruc ious c«n tained in the Tbiid v .liime of the TacMcs for heavy lu- funtry, approved by the War Di-piirtnieut, April 10th, 1836. TABLE OF CONTENTS. TTTLE FIKST. ARTICLE FIRST. P.VOE. Formation of a reg't in order of battle, or in line 3 Posts of f;oni|)iiny officers, hergcnuts and eorporals.. 3 Posts of ficl'i offi'cerh and regimental staff. 3 Posts of fiehl music and Vxind. 4 Color-guard 4 General guides * ARTICLE SECOND. Instruction of the liattalion 4 Instruction of offlccre 4 Instruction of hargeants ■* Instruction of corporals ,f^^. -t Commands "■• ^ TITLE SECOND. SCHOOL OF TUE SOLDIER. PART FIRST. General rules and division of the school of the sol- dier 5 XesDon /.—Position of the soldier (No. 78). Eyes right, left and front (Kos. 80.83) 5 iesion //.—Facings (Nob. 80, 91) 6 Lesium III. — Principles of the direct step in common and quick time (Nos. 9'1. Iii2^ <> Lesson IV. — i'riuciples ol the ttouble quick stcD (No. 104) ". 7 PART 8XCONl>. General rules 7 Lesson I. — Principles of shouldered anns 7 Lesson II. — Manual of arms. Support arms (No. 133i. Present arms (No. 143). Order arms (No. 147). Position of onler arms (No. 119). Load in nine tiines (No. 160). Kejidy (No 171). Aim (No. 174) Fire (No. 177j. Fix Imyonet (No 188). Charge l»ayon- et (No. 193) . Tii\if uriiis (No. 1!»7(. Unflx bayonet (Nti. 200). Secure urnis (No. •-;04). Right shoulder shift arms (No. '.il(i). Arms iil will (No. 219^. (jround arms (No. -Z-iZ). Inspection :irm8 (^Nc 1227). Remarks on the nnintiiil of arms (No. ;^37). .Mark time (No. 241). Cliange step (No. 245). Murch backwards (No. 247) 8 Lesson ///.-Load in four tifties (No. 250). Loud .tt will (No. 267) 12 Lesson /K.— Firings. Direct lire (No. 261). Oblique firings (No. 20(i). Position of fhu two ranks in the oblique fire to the right (No. JtiT). Position of tho two ranks in the oblique Hiv to the left (No 270). Fire by file (No. 275). Fire by rank (No 285) 13 Lesson T.— Fire and loud, kneeling (No. 292). Fire and load, lying (No. 3iio) 13 La»mm K/.— Bayonet axercise H TABLE OF CONTENTS. 83 PART THIRD. Leteon I. — Alignments 14 Lesson /f.— March by the front (No. 325). March by front ift double quick time (No. 334). Face about \ in marching (No. 343). March backwards (No. 345). 15 t««»oii III— March ty the fl.Tiik (No, 351). March by ^ the flank in double quic-k time (No. Sf-.S) 16 %e>ison /r.— General principles of wheelihg (No. 370). .Wheeling from a halt (No. 383). Wheeling m 'marchmg (No. 393). Turning (No. 400). Wheel- ing and turning in double quick time (No. 403) 17 iff-^on V. — Long marehos in double quick time and the run (No. 406). i^tack arm? (No. 410). Take ' arms (No. 413) 18 TITLE THIRD. SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. General rufes and division of the school of the com. i pany ^ 19 LESSON FIRST. Artich /.— To open rauk.s (No. 8) 19 Article II — .Alignments in open ranks (No. 18) 19 Article //I.— Manual of .arms (No. 20) 19 Article JV.—To close ranks (No. 28) 20 AriicU V. — .Alignments, and manual of arms in closed ranks (No. 3U) 20 LESSON SECOND. Article /.—To load in four times, and at will (No. 44). 20 Article II.— To fire by company (No. 48) 20 Article /JZ.— To fire by file (No. 55) 20 Article jr.— To fire by rank (No. 68) 21 ArtirU ('.—To fire by the rear rank 21 LESSON THIRD. Article I- — T'> advance in line of battle (No. 84) 21 Article II —To halt the company, marching in line of J battle, and to align it (No. 99) 22 XArticle III. — Oblique march in line of battle (No. 1 101) 22 Uriirle IT'.— To mark time, to march in double quick •ime, and the hack step (No. 109) 22 '■iicle K— To march in retreat (No. 119) 23 - LESSON FOURTH. IAriicle I.— To march by the flank (No. 135) 23 Article //.—To change direction by file (No. 142) 24 Article ///.—To halt' the company, marching by the flank, and to face it to the front (No. 145) .". 24 ; Article /K— The company being in march by the flank, to form it on the right or left, by file, into / line of battle (No. 148) 24 AArtfcfe r.— The company marching by the flank, to ^ form it by company or platoon into line, and cause > it to face to the right and left in marching (No. 153). 24 [ LESSON FIFTH. Artick I. — To break into column by platoon, cither ( at a halt, or marching (No. 171) 26 JHtde tl. — To march in column (No. 195) 2C MMe /I/.— To change direction (No. 211) 27 Y^le IV.— To halt the column (No. ''31) „... 27 kicle r.— BeinK in column by i)latoon, to form to the fright 'or left into liu'' of battle, either at a halt, or " marching (No. 23.0) 27 "^^^ Ll-i^ON SI.XTH. Article I. — To break t^ie company into jllatoons. and to re-i'orm the cori'pany (No. 265) 29 Article II. — To break files to the rear, and to cause them to re-ener into line (No. 289.) 29 Article III. — To manb in folurnn in route, and to ex- ecute the movpmf-.t'4 incident thereto (No. 306)... 80 I Article /F.— Countermarch (No. 334) 31 Article V. — Being in column bv platoon, to form on I the right or U'ft into line of battle (No. 343) 31 I Formation of a company from two ranks into single rank, and reciprocally" (No. 369) 32 Formation oT a company from two ranks into four, and reciprocally, at a halt, and marching (No. 371). 32 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. General principles and division of the instruction 33 Article /.-Deployments (No. 16). Deplov forward (No. 22). Der'loy by the flank (No. .37). Extend intervals (No. 51). Close iijttrvals (No. 59). Re- lieve skirmishers (No. 66) 34 Article //.—March to the front (No. 71). March in re- treat (Ncp. 79). Change direction (No. 86). March by the flank (No. 96) 36 Article ///.—Firings (No. 100). Firing at a halt (No. 107). Fire marching (No. 111). Observations (No. 120)..... 37 Article /F.- Rally (No. 127). Rally by sections(No.l32) Rally by pfatoons (No. 137). Rally on the reserve (No. 1.39). Form column (No. 14:3). Rally on the battitlion (No. IGl). Assemble on the reserve (No. (171) Assemble on the centre (No. 174) 38 Article V. — Deploy the battalion as skirmishers (No. 178). Observations (No. 194). Rally (No. 137.). •• 39 Manual of the sabre for officers 41 Salute of the color 41 Manual for relieving sentinels 41 Instruction for parade rest 41 Instruction for chief bugler, &c... 41 Generalcalls 41 Calls for skirmishers 42 TITLE FOUKTH. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. Formation of the battalion (No. 1) 42 Composition and march of the color escort (No. 4)... 42 Honors pi^'fl to the color (No. II) 42 General rules and division of the school of the battal- ion (No. 14) 42 PART FIRST. Article I.— To open ;md close ranks (No. 22) 43 j4r((c/e //.—Manual of arms (No. 30) 43 Article ///.—Loading at will, and the firings (No. 31). 43 PART SECOND. Article I. — To break by company (o the right (No. G9). Break by company to the left (No. 74). Break by division (No. 75). To break by company, march- ing (No. «4) 44 Article //.-Break to the rear by the right or left of companies (No. 87). Break to the rear l>y the right or left of comp.anies, marching (No. 94)" Advance or'retire by the right or left of companies (No. 105). Advance or retire by the right or left of compan- ies, marching i No. llu). Advancing or retiring, by the light or left of companies, to form line to the front (No. 11.3) 45 Article III. — Ploy the battalion into close column on the first division (No. 119). Floy the battalion into close column on the fourth division (No. 141). Ploy the battalion into close column on any interior di- vision (No. 143) Battalion being in march, to ploy It into column on the first division (No. 149) 46 PART THIRD. Artich I. — March in column at full distance (No. 164). Column being march, to execute the about (No. 170). Column arrivinz in fr«nt oi the line of bat'le, to prolong it on this line (No. 175). CoUimn arri- ft4 lACi-t. OK tvUWTiJUa Tinj? behind the line o' battle, to proloDg it od iftie line (No. IM . Coliunu arriviiiu oniherghlor loft of ihe line of liHtile. i- j>rolouj{ it on this line (No.lKr). JIanuer of |>roloniiiDK ft line by mark- ers (No. M*) « Ariiclt //.—Column in route (No. 19") 80 Article III.— ChBnfCt of direction in column at full distance (No. 2.11) Al ArticU IK.— Unit the iOlumn (No. 239) 51 ArluU V. — Close the column f. Clos*-- the column on the eighth company (No. 2i"."). Execute th s movement, roarchiog (No. n:\) 62 AriicU r/.— March in <*lumn at half dbitance, or alost-d in muss (N- 281) 63 ArticU VU -tJiangc direction m column at half dis- tan e N... 2>-7; M AriicU VIII. — tTienge dir«ction of a column closed in mnHs, man'hin); (No. 2^»). Ohanp* dir ciionof a column, r-lohed in ma-^x, from n halt (No. ;j0tj).... 63 Article IX. — Take distance.* V>y the heHd of the col- umn (No 32a> Take Idistai'cee by the rear of the column (No. 333). Take distance!* on the head of t e column (Xo. 341) 64 Article X. — t'.Minterman.'h of a column at full or half dihtince (No MX). Cduiueriiinr h of a column closed in mass (No. 352) 65 Artic'e XI. — Being in column by companj', closed in mft.«8. to form division.s (No. 361). To form divi- sions, marching (Nf. 37Gj 66 PART FOURTH. An cU I. — Manner of determining the lini' of Ijattle (No. 380) 67 Article //.—To form a column, «t full dintaiice, to the left into line of battle Ao. 39 ). To form a column to the richt in'o line of liatile iNo. S'.tu) A col- umn being in murch, to form it into line of biiule (Xo. 402; To form a column into line of battle, and to iiiov- it forward (No. 103). Hy uiver.sion to the right or left into line of battle (No. 4(i7). Col- umn at full distani-e, to form it on the right or left into line of battle ^No» 414'. Coumuatfuli dis- tance forward into 'iii<' of battle (No. lid). Forward into lin- of battle, marching (No. 462). Co'iimn at fu I distance, laeed to the re.T into line of batr o (No. 460 . Execute this movement, marching (No. 479). ■»■■ 57 AriicU ///.—Formation in line of batt'o by two move- tnenUs (.\o 4'5j 61 ArtiiAe /K.— Piflerent modes of forming co umn at ha'f dibtance, t<> the left or right, into ine ofbhtt «; (No. 501). By the rear of column, leit or right, into line, wheel (N >. 5 i3). Column at h i f dis- tance, on the riuht or left, into ine (No. 607). Column, at ha f distance, forward into line (.\o. 6 8). Co'umn, at half distance, faced to the rear int" line (No. 6(9) 62 AriicU r.— Dep'oyment of columns c'osed in mass (No. 510). Dep oymeut on the first division (No. 514). To dcpoy, whi st mnrchin'.', on the lirst di- vision (No. 6:12). To deploy without hating the tip umn, and to continue m'lwcbing (No. 63G). To Q0p oy on the fourth di»ision (No. 541). To de- pi- y, whilst marching, on the fourtli divi.sion (No. 656). To dep oy on an interior division (No. 5«3). To dep oy, whilst marching, on au interiordivifion (No. 667) 62 PAKT rrrra. ArHeU /.— To 8QV:ui' . m In.- ..f )..itt> (No ri-\.... 'T Article //.—Ob ii • Article JII.-lo ! of batt e, r. n.i Artirl IV--' a .u u.^. :. ~of batt e Article v.- . .ii in .ine Of ! 664 _ „. ArticU ri —To hat th'- ''iltaion. marching in re Uvat, an'l to Cice to the '■••m (No. ij7(.i Artcle V//.— Change ofdin^Uon, in iii retreat (No. GHl). ...^ Artrclt r///.— Passage 'f olstacles, ad\;. retreating (^No. iitfl.')---' i.> ArticU 7-1'.— To i>a-« a defile, in retreat, by the r(ght or left flank (No. 710) ^.... 7u .4rfc A'.— To march ' No. 722) 70 Article A'/.— To form tl, Mlir right or left, by file, into line of !■. i ..f _.. 71 Artl-lf XII.—' hange ^.1 li" : L'( rpendic'i :irly for- wanl (No T43i. hauge front fonvaid .■n the first / company, mar-hing (No. 7.>1). hange of firont I erpcnaicu ar v to the rear (.N". 7(".l;..... 71 Article .XIII.— Ti'> ploy the ti..it:i ion into column, doiib cd on th<' centre (No. 77'ii. To form doubte ( CO umn, marching (No. 7-7). Dep nymeu' of th> ' double column, need to th<" fronf (No. 7'.t6). De- p oymcnt of the doub e co umn, marching (No. 80(1). To form the doubl'- co iimii into lae of bat- t'e, fnced to the rig t or eft (No. 8 3,. To form the dpub e column ihto ine of bait e, Uu:e by one of its froiifs (No. SMV To halt the siinare (So. 86<»). The batiA ion being in square, to I'orni column to march to the front, a dLsUirico gr ili v ih'i thirty paces No. M.:iV To march the -i ;■ it.i g.-eat r disiMiii !• than thirt> pa^ Tli.' battn ion beinji in square, to mai \u ■■ ir in retreat, a distan e 'ess than ilm i. 1. 1 . -> (No, 8761. The CO iimr. inarching to the fro'i:. '■. in«rrh it in rcireat (No. 879). The column mmc! 'iig i:i retreat, to maieb it to the frunt f No. "-SI), 'fo r.> duco the sqiisre 1 No. s83). I'o form square ii ■ i line of batt e (No. :-86). Perponilicii ar s(|i:are i N 8^8). I'crpendicu'ar sqnaac, marching, (No v9o . To form square i y doub e co umn No. '!•'■;. To form square b\ doub o co iiiuii. niarchine ' No. Httli. Observations re ative to the toriiintion o' -quares in two ranks (No. WW). The o imiii being f rmed of four divisions, to p aee the inner p atoon« of th>' third division in resi>rv.- (No S.i8). .Stiimres in f'ur rinks(No. 910). The s.;i\aie formeil ;ii !.)■ r rank.'? being redi.ced, and at a 'lalt to form the i.atia ioa into two ranks (No. 01 (i . The co umn being In [,;,mnrch with division- fi^rnied in four ranks,, to re- form ii into two ranks (No. 92ii). To form sqiiatro in four ranks on one of the flank divisions (No. •.•2.1). I F'rm sqimr.-' in four ranks on the first division, marching (No. !)2H). Form perpendicular 8qt.'r»4p I four ranks, by doiib'e column (No. 931). ForifT ! perpen. 9.'quare (No. I 0'8). Ob ique -quale, 'bc'ing in co nmn i .Vo 01'. I Co umn against cav.'tiry (No. '.Hi')). The batt i: n I being no onger thnate^cd by cava'ry, lo form >- ! lumn .No.'.l7ii> .*• ; ArticU AK.— The ra y (No. 97'4iV i 80 I i4rtici« ACT/.— Rules for manaMivrmL' by the rear ; n.c I . tNo.979) '^'^